Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Revision Status:
Level: L1A
Classification: Policy and Procedure
Manual Number: HQS-HSE-PP-01
Issue Number: 03
Revision Number: 01
Revision Date: January 14, 2008
Transocean NONCONTROLLED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: TOC
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBSECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
SUBSECTION 2 ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
SUBSECTION 3 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION
SUBSECTION 4 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: TOC
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBSECTION 3 PLANNING
1 HYDROGEN SULFIDE
2 EMERGENCY RESPONSE
SUBSECTION 4 COMMUNICATION
1 HSE INFORMATION
2 HSE MEETINGS
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: TOC
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBSECTION 1 ACRONYMS/ABBREVIATIONS
SUBSECTION 2 DEFINITIONS
SUBSECTION 3 INDEX OF DOCUMENTATION
SUBSECTION 4 FILING OF DOCUMENTATION
SUBSECTION 5 INDEX OF KEYWORDS
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: N/A
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
PREFACE
The Health and Safety Management System described in this manual was compiled to
improve HSE performance while attempting to capture the hard-learned lessons
experienced in the past.
The policies and procedures in this manual are intended to address the hazards associated
with our operations. The system is designed to enable individuals and teams to carry out a
suitable and sufficient risk assessment for each task performed and maintain control to
prevent incidents.
To achieve our safety vision of an incident-free workplace, it is vital that we know our
people and enable them to contribute to their maximum potential while respecting the
diversity of cultures and personality traits of individuals.
Mentoring is important at all levels within the organization to ensure that the wealth of
knowledge of more experienced people is shared with less experienced people, to help
them achieve their full potential.
It is not through rules alone that we will achieve our vision of an incident-free work place. It
is through people actively caring and participating in our processes and by proactively
taking responsibility for the well being of themselves and their co-workers.
It is important that all personnel understand their obligation to interrupt the operation if they
observe an act or situation that could cause an incident.
The key tools within the system are the THINK Planning Process and the START
Observation and Monitoring Process. Proper planning is the first step to implementing an
incident-free operation. The THINK process reminds personnel to think about everything
they do before actually doing it. The START process of monitoring the operation and
reinforcing safe behavior, while correcting any unsafe acts or conditions, is vital to ensure
that the necessary controls remain in place during implementation.
Personnel must be responsible and held accountable for their actions if an incident-free
workplace is to be achieved.
This manual is a living document and depends on input from the end user to ensure it is
modified or updated as necessary. Please do not hesitate to provide any feedback you
have to Corporate HSE Department.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
N/A
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
PREFACE
MISSION STATEMENT AND CORE VALUES
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
N/A
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: N/A
PREFACE
HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICY STATEMENT
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBSECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
SUBSECTION 2 ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
SUBSECTION 3 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION
SUBSECTION 4 MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HSE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
SECTION: 1
MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of the Company Management System (CMS) is to define and communicate
Company leadership’s values, beliefs and expectations. This provides direction so people
can align their efforts and determine the best methods to achieve the desired results.
The CMS establishes consistent performance standards across the Company’s worldwide
operations; describes processes for monitoring results, improving performance, capturing
and sharing lessons learned; and provides people with the opportunity to align their
understanding of expectations, make personal commitments and apply their efforts to meet
performance standards.
This manual represents a Level 1A document within the CMS. Its purpose is to
communicate the Corporate HSE group performance standards. The Director of QHSE
Services is the designated owner of this document and is responsible for its content and
implementation.
Recommended changes to the procedures in this manual are submitted to Quality Services
through the SMART (System Management and Review Team) process, (see the CMS
Manual, HQS-CMS-GOV, in Section 5.1). The SMART process enables people at all
levels in the Company to propose and implement changes to the CMS through the
individual Core Management Functions.
The relationship between this manual and the other CMS documents is found in the CMS
Manual, HQS-CMS-GOV, in Section 5.2.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
All Company personnel at all levels of the organization have the responsibility to
comply with policy and procedures and participate in the achievement of annual
HSE goals. Participation fosters positive, proactive attitudes and behavior to help
meet HSE goals.
The Chief Executive Officer is ultimately responsible for the health, safety and
welfare of all personnel working at Company installations, facilities and offices.
Specific responsibilities include:
• Establishing and supporting the Company Safety Vision: “Our operations will
be conducted in an incident-free workplace – all the time, everywhere.”
• Reviewing and giving approval of the Company Quality, Health and Safety,
and Environmental Policy Statements applicable to worldwide operations.
• Give final approval of the necessary resources to maintain and improve the
HSE performance throughout Company operations.
• Attends Corporate QHSE Steering Committee meetings and participates in
regular reviews of overall HSE Performance to ensure effective HSE plans
are in place to achieve the Company Safety Vision.
• Ensure that the value placed on HSE is never compromised and safety is
placed on at least an equal footing to operations performance.
The Chief Operating Officer is responsible for the day-to-day operations of the
Company.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 1 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 2 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
1.6 SUPERVISORS:
• Participate in the development of installation HSE plans to achieve the
Company Safety Vision.
• Implement HSE policies and procedures within their departments.
• Ensure crewmembers are properly trained and fully understand plans for
upcoming tasks and their responsibilities within those plans.
• Provide advice and guidance to crewmembers, act as a positive role model.
• Take a leading, participating role in the Performance Monitoring Audit and
Assessment.
• Conduct and facilitate effective HSE meetings.
• Treat people as THEY NEED to be treated, know your people.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 3 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
2 ORGANIZATION
The C.E.O. is ultimately responsible for the safe and efficient operation of the
Company. The Chief Operating Officer is responsible for the day to day operations
of the Company. The Vice President QHSE is responsible for the activities of QHSE
Department to achieve global QHSE management objectives. The Director of QHSE
is responsible for the overall planning, maintenance and implementation of the HSE
Management System in order to achieve QHSE objectives. Figure A illustrates line
management at the executive level.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 4 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
3 HSE FUNCTION
The HSE Department is independent of line management and provides support and
advice on all matters related to HSE.
The role of the HSE Department includes three main areas: development and
communication of appropriate HSE Policies and Procedures, global HSE strategy
and support to operations, and development and deployment of Corporate
Operations Safety Advisors.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 5 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 6 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
GENERAL
ORGANIZATION, ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 7 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HSE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
SECTION: 1
MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
GENERAL
DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION
1 DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION
The document structure for HSE is shown below in Figure B. This includes the
departmental Policy and Procedure Manual (this document) and all supporting
manuals and documents. The manual types are identified by the third set of letters in
the manual number using Figure A.
Standards (Varies)
2 DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 2
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HSE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
SECTION: 1
MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
GENERAL
DOCUMENT ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that personnel understand what is required to
plan, recognize change and react by interrupting before the change leads to an
incident.
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all Company personnel that work at any Company installation,
facility or office.
4 PROCEDURE
4.1 GENERAL
START is used by the Company to monitor the plan and recognize when the plan is
no longer suitable.
Managing change while performing your task is simply the effective use of THINK
and START.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
FOCUS enhances the execution of THINK and START within the Management of
Change process by providing a consistent means to request, track and receive
additional expertise (knowledge, experience, skills) and approval from within the
organization.
If, while monitoring a plan, a change is recognized, the task must be interrupted to
assess the change and any new risks.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
The Management of Change process is carried out using one of three approaches:
• Simple
• Enhanced
• Exemption
To determine which approach applies to a given situation, the rules of task planning
must be followed by the person(s) involved in creating the new or revised plan.
• Does the new or revised plan comply with the Company Management System
procedures?
• Do I/we have the knowledge, experience, skills, and approval authority to
assess AND implement the new or revised plan?
If the answer to ALL of these questions is yes, the Simple Approach may be used.
If the new or revised plan complies with the Company Management System
procedures but the knowledge, experience, skills, or approval authority is NOT
available, the Enhanced Approach must be used.
The Enhanced Approach may be used even if the Simple Approach has been
determined to be acceptable, at the discretion of the personnel performing the risk
assessment.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
If the new or revised plan does not comply with the Company Management System
procedures, an Exemption must be requested.
The Rig Manager must review the FOCUS proposal and risk assessment to
determine if it is required and adds value, and if further assessment or additional
expertise is required. Examples of additional expertise are:
• Unit and Division management review and feedback of proposed changes.
• Engineering assistance via a Request for Engineering Assistance (REA) (See
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 2 subsection 4) (NOTE: Not all REAs will require
the use of FOCUS).
• Class/Flag/Regulatory approval.
• Corporate, Business Unit and Division SMART members.
• Technical field support - equipment specification or performance changes.
• HSE – safety system changes.
• Operations – well construction.
• Departments assisting with implementing proposed change.
• Specialized subcontractor.
If the Management of Change process uses the Enhanced Approach, the FOCUS
tracking software must be used.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
4.4 EXEMPTIONS
If a new or revised plan does not comply with the Company Management System
procedures, an exemption from that procedure is required. The exemption is
approved only after the Business Unit Vice President has reviewed, assessed and
confirmed the alternative procedure meets the intent of the policy.
If the change exceeds the authorized operational limits, the exemption is no longer
valid and a new exemption request is required. Operational limits on an exemption
define specific boundaries or criteria for execution of the plan.
A Task Risk Assessment and Request for Exemption form must be completed and
submitted with each exemption request to verify all associated risks are identified
and the control measures to prevent and mitigate those risks are clearly listed.
The Request for Exemption form progresses through line management, (Department
Head, OIM, Rig Manager, Sector Manager, Division Manager, to Business Unit Vice
President). During this progression, should any level not approve the Request for
Exemption form, the exemption request ceases and the Company Management
System procedure is complied with or the operation is not carried out.
The Business Unit Vice President may appoint a designate to approve exemption
requests.
The final approval authority must ensure that the alternative procedure effectively
monitors and controls the risks that would normally be addressed by the approved
Company Management System procedure.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
The final approval authority must determine if the risk is within the Company’s
executive leadership expectations, prior to approval.
The exemption approval process may be carried out via email provided all of the
following are met:
• the email title must clearly distinguish the exemption request,
• the email must contain the required documents for an exemption request,
• each approving authority must include the word “approved” in the body of
their email and define any special parameters for the approval, and
• all documents and forwarded emails must be retained on the installation as
per the exemption process.
All approved Request for Exemption forms must define a set period of validity. The
period of validity must include specific start and stop dates. Approved Request for
Exemption forms are not valid outside of the specific task, operation or work scope
described in the request.
All past and current approved Request for Exemption forms must be retained in a
dedicated file and kept in the OIM’s office.
The Business Unit Vice President is responsible to ensure all approved Request for
Exemption forms related to the Business Unit/Division Management system
procedures are reviewed and assessed by the Business Unit/Division System
Management and Review Team (SMART) member(s) to determine if Management
system changes are required.
The Corporate Director of QHSE is responsible to ensure the Request for Exemption
forms forwarded by the Division QHSE Manager are reviewed and assessed by the
Corporate System Management and Review Team (SMART) member(s) to
determine if Management System changes are required.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Using the FOCUS tracking software for Exemptions is not required but may be used.
The decision to use the FOCUS tracking software is based on:
• the criticality of a QHSE related situation requiring action,
• managers and supervisors requiring a defined process for review and
approval of planned actions,
• ensuring that specific actions related to an activity are effectively executed,
• ensuring important lessons learned are captured and made available, and
• tracking actions that may require an extended period of time to complete.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 OIM/SUPERVISORS:
• Review specific procedures (including Task Specific THINK Procedure), give
approval and submit to Rig Manager for final approval.
• Review and approve Task Risk Assessments and submit to Rig Manager for
final approval.
• Complete and approve Request for Exemption form.
• Ensure the Simple Approach is understood and implemented by all
employees.
• Understand the three approaches (Simple, Enhanced, Exemption) available
to develop plans and manage planned or unexpected change and execute
the Management of Change process.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
6 DOCUMENTATION
The Request for Exemption form is not to be modified from its original format. This
form must be reproduced and made available to all installations/facilities by their
Division/ Business Unit offices. Forward any suggested improvements to this form
using the QHSE Feedback form.
• Request for Exemption (Figure C)
(Must be retained in the OIM’s files for not less than three years.)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 1
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT OF CHANGE
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
MANUAL STRUCTURE
1 GENERAL
The objective of this system is to prevent incidents and eliminate injuries and
illnesses. The system provides a means by which Company HSE goals are
achieved, the needs of customers are met and the requirements of regulatory bodies
are satisfied, while maintaining the health and safety of our employees and
respecting the condition of our environment.
This section defines our mission and core values as a Company. It also describes
our corporate management’s commitment to health and safety.
This section defines the function and organization of HSE Services, provides an
introduction to the Health and Safety Manual and lists Company employee general
responsibilities regarding health and safety issues.
This section describes the structure or flow of the manual, details of QHSE Steering
Committees, mentoring details and ISM Code requirements.
This section is comprised of six subsections of safety policies, procedures and their
associated documentation.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
MANUAL STRUCTURE
This section explains the reason for which the policy exists.
The scope identifies the persons, groups, installations, facilities, offices and
equipment that the policy is intended to cover.
The procedure section contains the supporting procedures and forms to achieve the
intent of Corporate HSE policies described, unless an exemption has been applied
for and approved and adequate controls have been implemented.
3.5 5. RESPONSIBILITY
The responsibility section defines specific duties for specific personnel, or groups of
personnel, as they pertain to the related policy.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
MANUAL STRUCTURE
The documentation included in this manual may be forms, checklists, graphics, etc.,
and are either required by the policy or given as examples. This documentation
serves multiple purposes (for example, allows verification of compliance, serves as a
communication tool, becomes a form of record keeping, and so on). Some policies
have text instructions for filling out documentation. All documentation (required or
examples) included in this manual are referred to as “Figures” in the documentation
section.
All installation specific procedures approved by the Rig Manager are Level 3
documents.
5 DISCLAIMER
The policies, procedures and documentation stated herein are provided as basic
standards that have been developed in accordance with Company HSE
philosophies. Nothing herein is intended to conflict with any governmental laws or
rules or regulations now in effect or hereinafter enacted; such laws, rules and
regulations always take precedence over these standards.
Where a masculine or neutral pronoun is used in this manual, it includes both males
and females.
Where the term “Company” is used, it refers to Transocean Inc. and its subsidiaries.
These policies and procedures are subject to change by the Company at any time
for any reason. Past policies and procedures and the Company's interpretation of
such shall have no bearing on the Company's current policies and procedures
contained herein. Any deviation from current policies is not tolerated and failure to
comply with such policies may be grounds for disciplinary action. Finally, these
policies and procedures are not intended to, and do not, create an employment
contract between the Company and any employee.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES
The objective of the Company QHSE Steering Committee is to develop and promote
measures to ensure the health and safety of personnel and protection of the
environment through communication and cooperation between all levels of
management and the work force.
The system empowers all levels of the organization to be responsible for taking
action to prevent injuries, occupational illnesses, environmental incidents and
property damage to achieve an incident free environment.
1.2.2 RESPONSIBILITY:
• Provide guidance and assistance to Corporate QHSE Services.
• Review and approve Company QHSE policies and procedures.
• Set and review Company QHSE goals and plans for achievement.
• Review minutes of Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee
meetings, as appropriate.
• Review newly approved exemptions from Company QHSE policies and
procedures.
• Review minutes of Installation QHSE Steering Committee meetings as
deemed appropriate by Business Unit/Division/Sector Steering Committees.
• Forward minutes of the Corporate QHSE Steering Committee meetings to the
Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee, for review and
distribution to Installation QHSE Steering Committees.
• Review QHSE performance.
• Review ISM related issues (this topic MUST be included in the minutes even
if no issues were in need of discussion).
• Review Business Unit audit, assessments, compliance, non-conformity
tracking and close out status.
• Conduct any other business relating to QHSE matters.
• Review security issues related to planning, mitigation and response.
1.3.2 RESPONSIBILITY:
• Provide guidance and assistance to the Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE
Department.
• Review and approve QHSE policies and procedures.
• Set and review Business Unit/Division/Sector HSE goals to support Corporate
QHSE goals and plans for achievement.
• Forward minutes of the Business Unit/Division QHSE Steering Committee
meeting to the Corporate QHSE Steering Committee for review.
• Review minutes of Corporate QHSE Steering Committee meetings.
• Review minutes of installation QHSE Steering Committee as appropriate.
• Review Unit/Division/Sector QHSE performance. For example, audit reports,
incidents and client feedback.
• Review status of audit follow up/close out of non-conformities for all
installations within that Division.
• Review newly approved exemptions from Company HSE policies and
procedures.
• Review ISM related issues (this topic MUST be included in the minutes even
if no issues were in need of discussion).
• Review security issues related to planning, mitigation and response.
Installation QHSE Steering Committees must meet as required to allow each crew
the opportunity to attend a minimum of two meetings per year.
1.4.2 RESPONSIBILITY:
• Review Company QHSE policies and procedures.
• Set and review installation QHSE goals to support the Corporate and
Unit/Division/Sector QHSE goals and plans for achievement.
• Ensure installation QHSE goals address both incident rates and proactive
measures such as housekeeping, THINK, START and FOCUS processes,
safety meetings, and so on.
• Review minutes of Corporate and Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE
Steering Committee meetings.
• Forward minutes of the Installation QHSE Steering Committee meeting to the
Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee for review.
• Review and discuss QHSE improvement opportunities for the installation,
Business Unit/Division/Sector and Company.
• Post minutes of the Corporate and Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE
Steering Committee meetings in an appropriate area suitable for review by all
personnel.
• Review QHSE performance.
• Review newly approved exemptions from Company QHSE polices and
procedures.
• Review ISM related issues (this topic MUST be included in the minutes even
if no issues were in need of discussion).
• Review security issues related to planning, mitigation and response.
• Review status of installation’s audit follow up/close out of non-conformities.
Facility QHSE Steering Committees must meet as required, at least twice a year.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES
Responsibilities:
• Review QHSE Company policies and procedures.
• Set and review facility QHSE goals to support the Corporate and Business
Unit/Division/Sector QHSE goals and plans for achievement.
• Ensure facility QHSE goals and annual HSE plans address both incident
rates and proactive measures such as: housekeeping, THINK, START and
FOCUS processes, HSE meetings, and so on.
• Review minutes of Corporate and Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE
Steering Committee meetings.
• Forward minutes of the facility QHSE Steering Committee meeting to the
Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee for review.
• Review and discuss QHSE improvement opportunities for the facility,
Unit/Division/Sector and Company.
• Post minutes of the Corporate and Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering
Committee meetings in an appropriate area suitable for review by all
personnel.
• Review QHSE performance.
• Review ISM related issues (this topic MUST be included in the minutes even
if no issues were in need of discussion).
• Review newly approved exemptions from Company QHSE polices and
procedures.
• Review status of facility’s audit follow up/close out of non-conformities.
• Review security issues related to planning, mitigation and response.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES
2 DOCUMENTATION
The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Unit Vice President.
• QHSE Steering Committee Agenda (Figure A)
• QHSE Steering Committee Meeting Minutes (Figure B)
1. Copies of the Corporate QHSE Steering Committee agenda and minutes
must be retained in the Corporate office files for a period of two years, and
distributed to each Business Unit for review.
2. Copies of the Business Unit/Division/Sector QHSE Steering Committee
agenda and minutes must be retained in the Business Unit/Division office
files for a period of two years, and distributed to the Corporate office and
each installation for review.
3. Copies of the Installation QHSE Steering Committee agenda and minutes
must be retained in the installation files for a period of two years, and
distributed to the Business Unit/Division office for review.
4. Copies of the Facility QHSE Steering Committee agenda and minutes
must be retained in the facility files for a period of two years, and
distributed to the Business Unit/Division/Sector office for review.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
QHSE STEERING COMMITTEES
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
HSE MENTORING
The Company clearly recognizes the benefits associated with providing a working
environment in which people, at all levels of the Company, feel "connected" to the
Company and are given the opportunity to develop to their full potential. The FIRST
core values of the Company are an integral part of our daily lives. Improving human
behavior in all areas of our operation is fundamental to the success of individuals,
groups of individuals and the Company as a whole. One of the key elements in the
successful development of people is a network of mentors, within which people are
offered constructive feedback, advice, guidance and suggestions towards personal
and career development. People are respected and rewarded for helping each other
succeed.
2 WHAT IS A MENTOR?
The dictionary defines mentor as "a friend entrusted with education; a trusted
counselor, coach or guide." In modern terms, a mentor is someone who is a friend
and a role model; an able advisor; a person who lends his support in many different
ways to one pursuing specific goals.
3 WHO IS A MENTOR?
Many people have the potential to be a mentor, and may emerge from any level
within the organization. Generally speaking, supervisors should be the most
appropriate people to act as role models and mentors, simply because they have
more experience of life and work to communicate with less experienced people. In
very broad terms, a mentor is someone who has the positive personal attributes,
valuable knowledge, and the experience in their personal and working lives, which
can only be gained over a period of time. A great number of people are already
mentoring as individuals, husbands, wives, parents, friends, sports team members
and co-workers.
Mentors can be many things to many people; however, they all have similar clearly
recognizable characteristics:
• They often do not realize they are seen as mentors; they are "naturals."
• They enjoy mentoring and provide an atmosphere for learning.
• They don’t hesitate to ask other team members for advice or help when
needed, focusing on what is right, not who is right.
• They make a conscious effort to develop a sense of responsibility and
accountability within the team.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
HSE MENTORING
• They consider the other person's point of view, treat people as they need to
be treated and come to agreements.
• They keep their mentees informed.
• They naturally strive to develop and motivate people.
It is vital that we as a Company seek and take every opportunity to develop and
motivate people within the organization. People with valuable personal qualities and
talent are in positions around the world, and we understand the value of
communicating their life and work experiences to those less experienced. Our intent
is to provide a forum and structure so people are continually encouraged, motivated
and developed.
There is no set time or place for mentoring to take place. The important thing is that
it is provided regularly, and that it is honest and understood. Remember that
feedback, both supportive and constructive, is best given as soon as possible after
the event requiring it and is best given face to face and one-on-one, but does not
have to be. People can be mentored with a look, a letter, a gift, a conversation or
phone call. The mentor knows what is appropriate.
Some mentors are "naturals" in the art of mentoring and others need some advice
and guidance to improve their mentoring skills.
When trying to help each other, both people in the relationship must know if the
other has any concerns or worries. Ask broad, open-ended questions that give
people the latitude and permission to speak honestly and without risk. Do not pry;
you are a mentor not an inquisitor. Remember that when you ask a question it is vital
to listen to the answer. Be responsive to people's fears and concerns.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
HSE MENTORING
Communication is the glue that holds all relationships together and communication
must always be open and honest. A mentor should never apologize for providing
corrective feedback.
Mentors know that setbacks sometimes occur at work. Finding solutions for
problems is one of the strengths of a mentor. When searching for solutions, the
mentor always looks beyond personal interest to the "Big Picture."
Above all, mentors should understand that personal and team success is not a
single event but a continuous ongoing process. Mentors must find ways to stay
motivated towards success in endeavors.
As with many things, ACTION makes the difference, and the following steps are the
required actions for an effective mentoring network:
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE
1 ISM CODE
The purpose of the ISM Code is to provide an international standard for the safe
management and operation of ships and to prevent pollution.
The table below lists the 16 elements of the ISM Code and references to where
Transocean Inc. has addressed these elements.
1.1.11 Anniversary date - The day and month of each year that corresponds to
the date of expiry of the relevant document or certificate.
1.1.12 Convention - The International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea,
1974, as amended.
1.2 Objectives
The Objectives of the Code are to ensure safety at sea, prevention of
1.2.1 human injury or loss of life and avoidance of damage to the environment,
in particular to the marine environment and to property.
Safety management objectives of the Company should, inter alia:
1. provide for safe practices in ship operation and a safe working
environment;
1.2.2 2. establish safeguards against all identified risks; and
3. continuously improve safety management skills of personnel ashore
and aboard ships, including preparing for emergencies related both to
safety and environmental protection.
The safety and management system should ensure:
1. compliance with mandatory rules and regulations; and
1.2.3 2. that applicable codes, guidelines and standards recommended by the
Organization, Administrations classification societies and maritime
industry organizations are taken into account.
1.3 Application
The requirements of this Code may be applied to all ships.
4. Designated Person(s)
To ensure the safe operation of each ship and to provide a link between
the Company and those on board, every company, as appropriate, should
designate a person or persons ashore having direct access to the highest
level of management. The responsibility and authority of the designated
person or persons should include monitoring the safety and pollution
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE
prevention aspects of the operation of each ship and to ensure that the
adequate resources and shore-based support are applied, as required.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1 Subsection 2 and 3
5. Master's Responsibility and Authority
The Company should clearly define and document the master's
responsibility with regard to:
1. implementing the safety and environmental protection policy of the
Company;
2. motivating the crew in the observation of that policy;
5.1
3. issuing appropriate orders and instructions in a clear and simple
manner;
4. verifying that specified requirements are observed;
5. reviewing the SMS and reporting its deficiencies to shore-based
management.
1. HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1 Subsection 3, HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 3,
Subsection 1.8,HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3
2. HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 4.2
3. HQS-CMS-GOV Section 3, Subsection 1,HQS-0PS-PP-01 Section 3
Reference:
Subsection 2.1
4. HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 1 Subsection 3, Section 4, Subsection 5.1
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3
5. HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 2
The Company should ensure that the SMS operating onboard the ship
contains a clear statement emphasizing the master's authority. The
Company should establish in the SMS that the master has the overriding
5.2
authority and the responsibility to make decisions with respect to safety
and pollution prevention and to request the Company's assistance as may
be necessary.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 3, Subsection 1.8
Reference: HQS-OPS-HB-05 Section 3, Subsection 2.6, Appendix, 4
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3, Masters’ Job Description
6. Resources and Personnel
The Company should ensure that the master is:
1. properly qualified for command;
6.1 2. fully conversant with the Company's SMS;
3. given the necessary support so that the master's duties can be safely
performed.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 1.3
Reference: HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.3 Masters’ Job Description
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 6, Subsection 1 & 4.
The Company should ensure that each ship is manned with qualified,
6.2
certified and medically fit seafarers in accordance with national and
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE
international requirements.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 3 Subsection 1.1
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.4
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 6, Subsection 4
HQS-OPS-HB-03 Section 1, Subsection 1.
The Company should establish procedures to ensure that new personnel
and personnel transferred to new assignments related to safety and
6.3 protection of the environment are given proper familiarization with their
duties. Instructions that are essential prior to sailing should be identified,
documented and issued.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2 Subsection 3, Section 4 Subsection 1.1
Reference:
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Job Descriptions
The Company should ensure that all personnel involved in the Company
6.4 SMS have adequate understanding of relevant rules, regulations, codes
and guidelines.
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2 Subsection 3, Section 4 Subsection 1.1
The Company should establish and maintain procedures for identifying
6.5 any training that may be required in support of the SMS, and ensure that
such training is provided for all personnel concerned.
HQS-HRM-PP-01 Section 6 Subsection 1 & 5
Reference:
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 1.3
The Company should establish procedures by which the ship's personnel
6.6 receive relevant information on the SMS in a working language or
languages understood by them.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4 Subsection 4.1
Reference:
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 3, Subsection 8
The Company should ensure that the ship's personnel are able to
6.7 communicate effectively in the execution of their duties, related to the
SMS.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 2
Reference:
HQS-HRM PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 4.1
7. Development of Plans for Shipboard Operations
The Company should establish procedures for the preparation of plans
and instructions including checklists for key shipboard operations
concerning the safety of the ship and the prevention of pollution. The
various tasks involved should be defined and assigned to qualified
personnel.
HQS-HSE-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 2.1
Reference: HQS-HSE-PP-02 Section 4, Subsection 1
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 3, Subsection 2, Section 5, Subsection 2
8. Emergency Preparedness
8.1 The Company should establish procedures to identify describe and
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE
are maintained.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 1, Section 2, Subsection 3.
Reference:
HQS-OPS-PR-01 Section 2, Subsection 2, Section 2, Subsection 5.
The Company should establish procedures in the SMS to identify
equipment and technical systems, the sudden operational failure of which
may result in hazardous situations. The SMS should provide for specific
10.3 measures aimed at promoting the reliability of such equipment or
systems. These measures should include the regular testing of stand-by
arrangements and equipment or technical systems that are not in
continuous use.
HQS-OPS-PR-01 Section 3, Subsection 8.
Reference:
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 2.
The inspections mentioned in 10.2 as well as the measures referred to in
10.4
10.3 should be integrated into the ship's operational maintenance routine.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 4, Subsection 1.
Reference:
HQS-OPS-PR-01 Section 2, Subsection 2.
11. Documentation
The Company should establish and maintain procedures to control all
11.1
documents and data that are relevant to the SMS.
Reference: HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 2 & 3.
The Company should ensure that:
1. valid documents are available at all relevant locations;
11.2
2. changes to documents are reviewed and approved by authorized
personnel; and obsolete documents are promptly removed.
HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1
Reference: HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 1, 2 & 3.
HQS-OPS-HB-03 Section 1, Subsection 2.
The documents used to describe and implement the SMS may be referred
to as the Safety Management Manual. Documentation should be kept in a
11.3
format that the Company considers most effective. Each ship should carry
onboard all documentation relevant to that ship.
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 2 & 3.
Reference: HQS-OPS-PP-01 Section 2, Subsection 1.
E-docs
12. Company Verification, Review and Evaluation
The Company should carry out internal audits to verify whether safety and
12.1
pollution prevention activities comply with the SMS.
HQS-CMS-GOV Section 5, Subsection 6.
Reference: HQS-CMS-PR-02
HQS-HSE-PP-02 Section 5, Subsection 1
The Company should periodically evaluate the efficiency of and review
12.2
the safety management system in accordance with procedures
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 2
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION AND INFORMATION
ISM CODE
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Medical Preparedness of Overseas Assignment
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all Company employees and their accompanying dependents.
4 PROCEDURE
Certain countries pose a higher medical risk to personnel, beyond the Company's
control. A listing of specific higher risk countries can be accessed on the Corporate
QHSE website.
The Corporate Medical Advisor is responsible for the content of the Overseas
Medical Briefing.
based, this briefing must be recorded in their installation Personal Medical Record
upon arrival.
Personnel with known, serious, existing health conditions, which may be difficult to
adequately treat in local medical facilities, must be pre-screened and their
assignment re-assessed.
4.2 IMMUNIZATION
Prior to traveling, personnel must be made aware of the required and recommended
immunizations for the area to which they are assigned. A list of required and
recommended immunizations can be found on the Corporate QHSE website and the
Med-Track website at www.internationalsos.com/medtrack. (Employees should use
their Company employee number as the member number required at login.)
The Corporate Medical Advisor is responsible for the content of the Malaria Briefing.
The briefing must include both preventive measures and information on procedures
to follow if symptoms develop after returning from a malaria-endemic area.
Division management must ensure that personnel who have been assigned to a
malaria-endemic area are provided with the Malaria Briefing before traveling. If
personnel are installation based, receipt of this briefing must be recorded in their
installation Personal Medical Record upon arrival.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Medical Preparedness of Overseas Assignment
The Malaria Briefing is available on the Corporate QHSE website; the Medical
Protocols contain the specific procedures related to malaria.
4.4 MEDTRACK
Internationally assigned and employees who travel internationally for business must
follow the periodic Medtrack medical examination program.
• A Company authorized physician must conduct all Medtrack examinations.
• On completion of the medical examination, the authorized physician must
issue a temporary certificate indicating the employee's fitness to work.
• The Medtrack Medical Director will liaise as necessary with the Corporate
Medical Advisor to make final determination on employee fitness to work. The
final fitness certificate will be available on the Medtrack website after
approximately 15 working days.
• All Company employees present on a Company installation or facility outside
of their home country for more than 24 hours must be in possession of a
fitness certificate indicating the employee is fit for work.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Medical Preparedness of Overseas Assignment
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to effectively control exposure to pathogens in the work
place.
3 SCOPE
4 PROCEDURE
4.1 PATHOGENS
Pathogens can be transferred by contact with blood or other bodily fluids. These
fluids include:
• Semen
• Vaginal fluid
• Cerebrospinal fluid
• Synovial fluid
• Amniotic fluid
• Saliva
While intact skin offers some protection against blood and other bodily fluid
transmission of pathogens, transmission may take place via accidental injection with
needles, scalpels, shards of glass and other sharp objects. Pathogen transmission
may also take place through open cuts, nicks and skin abrasions. There is also
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens
evidence that transmission can take place by infected splashes to the eyes and
mucous membranes.
4.2 TRAINING
Persons with certain job responsibilities, whose duties may bring them into contact
with blood or bodily fluids, are deemed to have a potential for occupational exposure
to pathogens.
The above training must be fully documented and available for review.
Each installation and facility must maintain a list of those personnel with a potential
for occupational exposure to pathogens. These include but are not limited to:
• Installation Medical Person
• First aid providers
• Fire and rescue teams
• Maintenance staff (maintenance on Sanitary Systems)
• Catering staff
Pathogen protection kits must be readily available for use by first-aid providers and
others that may assist.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens
All used or exposed “sharps,” including but not limited to needles, scalpels, glass,
and so on, must be disposed of in a leak-proof, puncture-resistant container.
Whenever possible, single-use medical equipment (for example, suture kits) must be
used.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens
5.2 OIM:
• Ensure pathogen awareness training is available and documented for
required personnel.
• Identify personnel deemed to have a potential for occupational exposure to
pathogens and ensure a list of those personnel is maintained.
• Ensure pathogen protection kits and necessary personal protection
equipment are available for use by personnel.
6 DOCUMENTATION
The form indicated below is included in the manual as an example only and is
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not
used exactly as it is included, the form used must include the key elements of the
example and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Statement of Understanding (Pathogens) (Figure A)
(Completed form to Division office and a copy in the individual’s personnel file
for duration of assignment)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Pathogens
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all Company personnel and installations and all Units, Divisions,
Sectors and Branches.
4 PROCEDURE
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Business Unit management must ensure a standard is determined for the type and
quantity of clinic equipment, medications and disposable items utilized within the
Unit.
The determination whether medicines are prescription or over the counter will be
based on the United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA). For Company
purposes any medicine, or dosage of medicine, identified as prescription by the FDA
is considered a prescription medication in every area of operation.
Controlled drugs must be stored and locked in a specific locker at all times. The OIM
must ensure that a system is in place for the issuance of these controlled drugs. The
OIM must countersign the controlled drugs register at each crew change of the
Installation Medical Person (IMP), and after each administration of a controlled drug.
The OIM must ensure there is an effective system in place for the disposal of out of
date controlled and prescription drugs.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
The clinic must be equipped with a “hands-free” system, which allows the IMP to
speak directly to Topside Support.
The clinic must not be used for accommodation purposes other than during
circumstances when the IMP needs to monitor or attend to a patient.
The IMP must attend periodic theoretical and practical refresher training as per the
Company training matrix.
The IMP must maintain a current certification or license in Advanced Cardiac Life
Support (including CPR and use of a manual Defibrillator) or equivalent course
approved by the CMA.
At each crew change of the IMP, the oncoming must function test all major clinic
equipment as per manufacturer's recommendation. This includes, but is not limited
to, all cardiac equipment (AEDs/manual defibrillators, laryngoscopes, resuscitators,
oxygen levels, and so on). Any malfunctioning equipment must be immediately
reported to the OIM.
The IMP must inventory all medicines and disposable items on a monthly basis. All
deficiencies must be immediately reported to the OIM.
The IMP must obtain authorization from Topside Support prior to the administration
of any controlled or prescription drug, including non-prescription drugs at
prescription strength, unless managing an emergency situation and following
Company approved medical protocol.
The IMP must follow medical protocols for emergency situations where authorization
is not timely or possible. The Medical Protocols followed must be the Company
approved (see HQS-HSE-PR-02) unless local (Unit/Division) medical protocols have
been adopted and approved by Business Unit management as well as the Corporate
Medical Advisor.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
The Medical Protocols followed should be available on the Unit or Division QHSE
website. A hard copy must be current and maintained in the installation clinic.
The IMP must maintain the overall cleanliness and housekeeping of the clinic.
The IMP must brief and maintain people’s awareness of health issues (malaria,
typhoid, and so on).
More detailed instructions can be found in the Medical Protocols, see HQS-HSE-PR-
02.
General information relating to all treatment provided must be recorded using the
Medical Activity Log.
At each crew change of the IMP, the oncoming IMP must create a new Medical
Activity Log for the duration of that hitch.
The Medical Activity Log is "public domain" and may be distributed as such.
Copies of the Medical Activity Log must be reviewed at least quarterly by the OIM
and initialed for confirmation.
The Patient Contact Report is a "privileged document" and must be treated as such.
Only authorized Company personnel may view Patient Contact Reports.
A copy of the Patient Contact Report generated must be included in the individual's
personal medical record each time medical attention is rendered to that individual.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Individual Personal Medical Records must be updated upon arrival on the installation
and as necessary thereafter to indicate the following personal and pertinent past
medical information:
• Name and address
• Blood type (if known)
• Any known allergies
• Significant past medical history (example; major surgery, any hospital
treatment)
• Long term prescribed medication
• Emergency contact name (first and last names) and telephone number(s)
• Signed permission for accepting or declining blood transfusions in life
threatening situations administered at clinics within the assigned Unit
• Signature affirming receipt of Malaria and Medical briefings (if appropriate)
(See Section 3 Subsection 1.1)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
The Corporate Medical Advisor will evaluate key aspects of the chosen Topside
Support provider to ensure the most appropriate and effective medical care possible
can be provided. The key aspects evaluated are, as a minimum:
• Medical competency of personnel
• Capabilities of the medical infrastructure
• Effective proximity of the medical support to the operation
For specific duties of the Topside Support provider, see HQS-HSE-PR-02 (Medical
Protocols).
Local medical provider(s) must be identified in all areas of operation. The selection
of a Local Medical provider by Unit or Division management must be assessed and
evaluated by the Corporate Medical Advisor prior to implementing.
The LMP should advise and provide support to management on health related
matters, including health promotion campaigns (when applicable).
The Corporate Medical Advisor will evaluate key aspects of the Local Medical
Provider to ensure the most appropriate and effective medical care possible can be
provided. The key aspects evaluated are, as a minimum:
• Medical competency of personnel
• Capabilities of the medical infrastructure
• Effective proximity of the medical support to the operation
• Access to and level of client’s medical facilities
The Local Medical Provider is responsible for providing local medical treatment
onshore. The local medical provider may, at the request of Topside Support or local
management, provide logistical coordination and support of local medical care.
Where local medical infrastructure and resources are readily available, Topside
Support and Local Medical Provider responsibilities may be combined as a single
provider.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Medical audits must be used to evaluate the physical condition of installation clinics
and treatment facilities as well as the physical condition of Company retained, or
potentially retained, onshore hospitals, clinics and treatment facilities.
Medical audits must be conducted using the Company standard medical audit.
Medical audits must include audit of compliance with the Sanitation and Hygiene
policy and procedure. (See Section 3 Subsection 3.1)
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
5.3 OIM:
• Ensure that a system is in place for the issuance of controlled drugs.
• Countersign the controlled drugs register at each crew change of the
Installation Medical Person and after each administration of a controlled drug.
• Ensure that there is an effective system is in place for the disposal of out of
date controlled and prescription drugs.
• Review and initial copies of the Medical Activity Log at least quarterly
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
• Review medications list in use for each area of operation to determine which
medications are classified as prescription only.
• Advise Business Unit management which medications must be classified as
prescription only based on the U.S. FDA.
• Approve the selection of physicians and clinics proposed by Business Unit
Management.
• Approve Medical Protocols proposed by Business Unit management for use
on installations.
• Maintain a system of area/country medical risk ranking to establish the
frequency of medical audits.
6 DOCUMENTATION
The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• The Function Check-list of Major Equipment (Figure A)
(Must be retained in the installation files for not less than one year)
• Monthly Inventory (of Drugs, Consumables and Perishables) (Figure B)
(Must be retained in the installation files for not less than one year)
• Controlled Drugs Register (Figure C)
(Must be retained in the installation files for not less than one year)
• Individual Personal Medical Record (Figure D)
(Must be kept in the individual's confidential personal medical file)
• Medical Activity Log (Figure E)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
(Copies must be retained in the installation files for not less than 3 years)
• Patient Contact Report (Figures F1 – F4)
(One copy must be retained in the installation clinic files for at least 3 years)
(One copy must be maintained in the person's Personal Medical Record)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 16 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 18 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Installation Clinics, Medical Documentation and Worldwide Onshore Care
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 20 20
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Potable Water
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all water intended for human use (for
example, drinking, showering, cooking, and so on.) is free from bacteria and other
harmful impurities.
3 SCOPE
4 PROCEDURE
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Potable Water
The results of all weekly and annual potable water tests must be entered into the
planned maintenance system. A copy of the results must also be stored in the files
of the installation clinic.
Dedicated hoses used for transferring potable water from supply vessels to the
installation must be suitable for potable water and clearly identifiable at both ends of
the hose.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Potable Water
All potable water from supply vessels must be tested for residual chlorine, pH, taste,
odor and turbidity before transferring to onboard holding tanks. (Allowable
parameters for residual chlorine are: 0.2 – 0.4 mg/L or 0.2 – 0.4 ppm.) Water that
does not meet the requirements must not be taken onboard.
Maintenance of the potable water systems must include cleaning of the potable
water tanks at least every three years to remove bio-films and sediment.
All potable water must pass through a brominator or silver ionizer followed by an
ultraviolet system to ensure microorganisms are eliminated. An ultraviolet system
alone does not provide residual effect after treatment. Use of a brominator or a silver
ionizer system provides the residual effect after treatment.
All drinking fountains and ice machines must be equipped with a filtering device to
further purify water before being ingested. The filtering device must be cleaned
and/or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
All drinking fountains, ice machines and coffee/tea makers that have fixed fill lines
must be entered into the planned maintenance system.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 OIM:
• Ensure testing of potable water in accordance with this procedure.
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all personnel are adequately protected
from the harmful effects of unsuitable sanitation/hygiene practices and second hand
smoke.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers any Client, subcontractor or outside agency that work at any
Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
4.1 INSPECTIONS
The accommodation, offices, galley, mess hall, food storage and recreation areas
must be inspected weekly.
4.2 TRAINING
It is the responsibility of the catering contractor to provide the training required for
catering personnel prior to arrival on the installation.
Prior to commencing work at any installation or facility, all catering personnel must
be instructed, and refreshed annually, in the following:
• Emergency drills and duties
• Fire fighting, fire prevention and fire fighting equipment associated with the
galley, mess hall, accommodation and laundry areas
Each catering services provider must offer a “heart healthy” diet option at meal
times.
Fresh fruits and vegetables must be offered at snack times and as an alternative
side dish during meal times.
The OIM or designee must periodically inspect the containers used for the
transportation of food products from onshore to Installations paying specific attention
to the general physical condition of doors, seals and closing devices. The principal
objective is to ensure the overall cleanliness and to establish the container's ability to
maintain temperatures within the required limits.
The Installation Medical Person must be present during all food deliveries and must
inspect all food items to ensure food quality. Questionable food items which appear
to be contaminated or spoiled must be discarded. Meats that are partially thawed
must be discarded. Results from this inspection must be documented with the
weekly inspection and the catering company must be informed of the inspection
findings.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
When removed from the original container, all food, whether raw or prepared, must
be stored in a clean covered container to protect against possible contamination.
All food must be given an arrival date and rotated so that foods are used on a first-in,
first-out basis. The “use by” date takes precedence over the arrival date.
All “walk-in” refrigerators and freezers must have a functioning lock-in alarm system
to sound in a permanently manned area. The alarm system must be included in the
planned maintenance system.
All foods stored in refrigerators must either be in a suitable food storage container or
covered by disposable wraps, such as foil, wax paper, plastic wrap, and so forth.
Cloth towels may not be used to cover food.
Frozen food must be wrapped in freezer paper or left in its original container to
prevent freezer burns.
Foods must be stored on racks and not placed directly on the floor. Use of wood
pallets for floor racks is not permitted.
Cooked and uncooked foods must be stored separately to prevent any cross-
contamination.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
Foods and food dressings must be kept refrigerated and left out only during meal
times.
Poultry, meats and stuffing containing meat products must be cooked until all parts
of the food are heated to a temperature of 75 degrees Centigrade/167 degrees
Fahrenheit.
Pork must be cooked until "well done" and no pink meat is visible.
All vegetables and fruits intended to be consumed raw must be thoroughly washed.
Physical contact with food must be kept to an absolute minimum. Personal hygiene
must be strictly maintained during food preparation and service to eliminate
contamination.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
Only personnel trained and designated as food handlers may prepare and serve
foods (Cooks, Cook's Helpers and Bakers).
Packaged foods marked with a "sell by" or "use by" date, must be discarded when
date is passed.
Seafood that is discolored (pinkish), soft to the touch, or has a foul odor must be
disposed of immediately.
Red meats and poultry that are discolored (greenish) or produce a foul odor must be
disposed of.
Leftovers, such as chicken and seafood, must not be placed in the break rooms for
consumption.
Processed meats may be used for snacks provided they are not left out longer than
90 minutes.
Foods that are highly perishable (such as minced/ground meats, gravies, dressings,
egg salad and tuna salad) may not be retained or reused.
Food preparation tables must be washed and sanitized after each use.
Food preparation areas must have one sink equipped for washing hands with hot
and cold running water, filled soap dispenser and material for drying hands using a
sanitary technique. (For example, air dryer or disposable towels).
All kitchenware, food contact surfaces, equipment and utensils must be thoroughly
washed and sanitized after each use. Special attention must be given to meat slicing
machines, food mixers, can openers, grinders and cutting boards.
Where a dishwasher is used, the temperature of the wash and rinse water must be
as per the manufacturer's instructions.
When a dishwasher is unavailable, dishes and eating utensils must be washed and
rinsed in an approved solution and must be air-dried.
Deep fat fryers must be drained and strained daily and covered with a lid made of a
non-absorbent material.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
Grills, stovetops and drip pans must be cleaned at least once per shift, If foil is used
as inserts in the drip pans, it must be changed daily.
All "reach in" refrigerators must be emptied of their contents and cleaned weekly.
The grating in the walk-in refrigerator must be removed and the floor cleaned
weekly.
The grating in the walk-in freezer must be removed and the floor cleaned monthly.
Each installation must have a procedure in place for disinfecting all utensils,
equipment and food contact surfaces. This procedure must include, as a minimum,
the use of 20% bleach solution.
Dirty work clothes must be laundered after each working shift. Personal clothing
must be laundered on a regular basis.
Dirty work clothing, shoes or boots are not allowed within the accommodation.
Maintenance staff must give full consideration to hygiene when performing
maintenance within the accommodation.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
All personnel using the mess hall must comply with the following:
• Wash hands, forearms and face (when needed) prior to using the mess hall.
• Wear reasonable footwear (footwear that provides suitable protection in the
event of an emergency), trousers/short pants and at least a 'T' shirt.
• Sleeveless vests/shirts may not be worn.
4.10.2 ROOMS
All rooms must be swept and mopped daily. Grease and oil marks must be removed.
Hallways must be swept and mopped at least daily and as often as needed to
maintain a high standard of cleanliness.
Washbasins, toilets, urinals, and shower stalls must be used as designed and
cleaned and disinfected daily.
Grease and finger marks must be removed from doors and walls daily.
All beds must be changed (fresh linen) at least every seven days.
Beds must be changed immediately after notification by the OIM, or designee, that
the occupant has departed the installation.
Each individual who uses the break/change room must be responsible to maintain
the room in a clean and orderly condition.
The OIM must ensure that personnel who use these rooms maintain them in a clean
and orderly condition.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
Movie rooms, cinemas, recreation rooms, reading rooms, gymnasiums and any
designated leisure area must be cleaned daily or more frequently as needed.
All spaces inside the living accommodation used to conduct business and meetings
must be cleaned at least daily. Cleaning must include:
• Floors swept and mopped
• Trash cans emptied
• Window ledges and furniture dusted
• Grease and finger marks removed from doors, walls and furniture
All personnel must seek early treatment for superficial skin infections and
inflammations.
All personnel must seek early treatment for transmittable diseases, such as colds
and flu.
All community sink areas used by personnel to wash hands (For example, change
rooms and community shower or toilet areas) must be equipped with a disposable
paper towel dispenser or air dryer.
The Company is concerned with the health of all its employees. To allow both
smokers and non-smokers to live and work in confining conditions with a minimum of
health risks and inconvenience, the following must be adhered to:
• Smoking may only be allowed in areas designated by the installation or facility
QHSE Steering Committee and approved by the Division Manager.
• Any area outside or inside the accommodations where smoking is permitted
must be clearly marked.
• Smoking must be prohibited in all other areas.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
Cabins, offices, control rooms, radio rooms, kitchens, dry stores, cold stores,
lockers, freezers, food preparation areas and laundries may not be designated as
smoking areas.
Designated smoking areas outside the accommodation must have a clearly visible
means of warning personnel (for example, a flashing or rotating light) when smoking
is not permitted for any reason, such as gas being detected.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
5.4 OIM:
• Jointly conduct, or appoint a designee to jointly conduct, the weekly sanitation
and hygiene inspection with the Camp Boss and Installation Medical Person.
• Conduct, or appoint a designee to conduct, a periodic inspection of the
containers used for the transportation of food products from onshore to
installations paying specific attention to the general physical condition of
doors, seals and closing devices.
• Ensure notification to the Camp Boss that an occupant has departed the
installation.
• Ensure that personnel who use Change/Break rooms maintain them in a
clean and orderly condition
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 3
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
6 DOCUMENTATION
The form indicated below is included in the manual and is intended to provide
operations with a minimum list of areas to be inspected. It is expected that each
installation must modify the form to add relevant areas.
• Weekly Sanitation and Hygiene Checklist (Figure A)
(Copies must be retained in the Installation/facility files for a period of one
year)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL SECTION: 3
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
HEALTH POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Sanitation, Hygiene and Smoking Limitations
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBSECTION 3 PLANNING
1 HYDROGEN SULFIDE
2 EMERGENCY RESPONSE
SUBSECTION 4 COMMUNICATION
1 HSE INFORMATION
2 HSE MEETINGS
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
1 POLICY
All personnel must receive a HSE Orientation suitable for their work
environment prior to commencing work or during a visit.
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all personnel receive critical safety
information and understand site specific hazards prior to having access to the work
site.
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all personnel who work at or visit any Company installation, facility
or office.
4 PROCEDURE
4.1 SECURITY
All installations must have a system in place to ensure all first-time arrivals are met
by the OIM or designee.
All personnel arriving on an installation for the first time or any person who has not
been on the installation within 6 months must attend an HSE Orientation and sign a
form to verify their understanding.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
The Company approved system must be in place to easily identify individuals who
are visiting or new to the installation (See Section 4 Subsection 2.4, paragraph
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
4.3). The OIM or designee must determine how long an individual is identified as
new or visiting and any further training requirements that are required to ensure
effective understanding of HSE procedures (for example, Permit To Work, Fall
Protection, and Emergency Response Duties).
A short-term visitor is someone who will be departing the installation on the same
day as arrival.
All personnel who will not be performing any actual work and who must be
accompanied by a Company employee at all times must receive the following:
• An overview of the Core Values, Mission Statement and HSE Policy
Statements to ensure understanding the importance of these documents and
what they represent.
• Information on current operations and the individual’s obligation to interrupt
the operation or raise justifiable personal HSE concerns.
• A written installation-specific “Welcome Onboard Card.”
• Explanation of emergency signals, muster stations and station bills, including
roles and responsibilities.
• Information on emergency preparedness, which must include reference to
donning instructions for life jackets, personnel escape equipment and smoke
hoods.
• General HSE information, including PPE, high noise areas, jewelry and
mobile phones.
• Explanation of the requirements to report any known allergies or current
medication.
• Explanation of the drugs, alcohol and weapons policy. (They are not allowed.)
All personnel performing work or not being accompanied at all times must receive
the following, in addition to the above:
• Introduction to the THINK, START and FOCUS Processes.
• Instruction on reporting of incidents – all injuries and incidents to be reported
and who to report them to.
• General HSE information, including designated smoking areas,
housekeeping, and PTW.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
• Information on hazards associated with, and the safe operation of, power-
operated and/or remote-controlled equipment such as watertight doors,
hatches and winches.
• Information on restricted or controlled access areas such as columns, lower
hulls and transformer rooms.
• Instruction on environmental awareness and waste management procedures.
• Information about the safety representative (if applicable).
All returning crew members to the installation must undergo a HSE review briefing
with the OIM or his designated representative within 6 hours of arriving on board.
The following, but not limited to, must be included in the review:
• Installation’s current HSE performance, inclusive of progress and status of
Installation Specific HSE Plans.
• All HSE incidents which have occurred on the installation since personnel last
departed the installation on field break, inclusive of corrective actions.
• Each returning individuals training compliance status, inclusive of planned
schedule to achieve or maintain compliance.
Key personnel with specific HSE duties (for example, Installation Medical Person,
emergency response teams, and so on) must receive additional specific instruction
on their duties.
Company personnel in the “buddy system” must spend sufficient time together
before, during or after tour to familiarize the newcomer with the installation, policy
and procedure manuals; and instruction manuals specific to the position.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
The OIM or designee must determine the content and the duration of the “buddy
system” for personnel transferred between installations and newly promoted
personnel, taking into account the individual’s knowledge and experience.
All personnel arriving at a Company facility (for the purpose of performing work) for
the first time or who have not been at the facility within 6 months must be given an
HSE Orientation unique to that facility. This orientation must be given before
personnel can begin to work. As a minimum, all personnel must receive the
following:
• An overview of the Core Values, Mission Statement and location of HSE
Policy Statements to ensure understanding the importance of these
documents and what they represent.
• Information on tasks in progress and the individual’s obligation to interrupt the
operation or raise justifiable personal HSE concerns.
• A written facility specific HSE Information Card.
• Explanation of emergency signals, muster stations, and roles and
responsibilities.
• Introduction to THINK, START and FOCUS Processes.
• Explanation of the Colors process.
• Information on HSE meetings – weekly, pre-tour, pre-task.
• Explanation of how and where to receive QHSE and ISM information (Bulletin
Boards, training material).
• Instruction on reporting of incidents – All injuries and incidents to be reported
and who to report them to.
• General HSE information, including designated smoking areas, high noise
areas, housekeeping, jewelry, PTW and PPE.
• Facility-specific safety information, procedures and hazards (asbestos, and so
on).
• Explanation of the drug, alcohol and weapons policy. (They are not allowed.)
• Explanation of personal impairment policy.
• Information on environmental awareness and waste management
procedures.
• Information about the safety representative (if applicable) and QHSE Steering
Committee.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
All personnel must be introduced to their supervisor to ensure they understand their
responsibilities and are familiarized with their work area, emergency equipment
layout and emergency exits. Clients visiting or inspecting the facility must be
escorted and supervised.
All personnel visiting any Company office must be verbally provided with alarm and
emergency evacuation procedures.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
All personnel must be introduced to their supervisor to ensure they understand their
responsibilities and are familiarized with their work area, emergency equipment
layout and emergency exits. Clients visiting or inspecting the office must be escorted
and supervised.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
6 DOCUMENTATION
The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
Completed HSE Orientation verification forms for individuals who do not have
personnel files, such as visitors or service personnel, must be retained in the
installation/facility or office files for a period of one year.
• HSE Orientation Verification (Installations & Facilities) (Figure A)
(Retain in the individual’s personnel file for a minimum of three years)
• HSE Orientation Verification (Short Term Visitor) (Figure B)
(Retain in the individual’s personnel file for a minimum of three years)
• HSE Orientation Verification (Office Orientation) (Figure C)
(Retain in the individual’s personnel file for a minimum of three years)
• Welcome Onboard Card-Front (Figure D1)
• Welcome Onboard Card-Back (Figure D2)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
HSE Orientation
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 13
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace
1 POLICY
Those who refuse to participate in, cooperate with, or abide by the rules of this
policy or the terms of this policy are subject to disciplinary action up to and
including termination. In some cases of drug, alcohol and weapon possession,
because of safety considerations an employee may be terminated
immediately.
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to advise all employees of the Company’s position on
drugs, alcohol and weapons in the workplace.
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all persons employed by the Company on a full-time, part-time or
temporary basis, and all installations and facilities. Lease or contract personnel
performing work for the Company, on or off the premises, or other third parties on
Company premises, are subject to this policy to the maximum extent practicable.
4 PROCEDURE
4.1 INVESTIGATIONS/SEARCHES
All personal items such as pockets, packages, bags, briefcases, lunchboxes, purses,
toolboxes or other belongings or items including motor vehicles, being brought onto,
on or being removed from Company premises are subject to inspection by the
Company or its authorized agents at any time. Likewise, all Company-assigned
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace
property such as, but not limited to, motor vehicles, lockers, desks, quarters of all
employees and other personnel are subject to inspection.
4.2 TESTING
All employees are subject to clinically accepted tests (urinalysis, blood tests, hair,
etc.) that may be deemed appropriate by the Company, to detect the use or
presence of alcohol, illegal drugs, unreported medication or prescription drugs, or
other prohibited substances.
The Company reserves the right to require clinically accepted tests (urinalysis, blood
tests, breathalyzer, hair, etc.) of employee at any time for the following reasons:
• Reasonable Cause – Where good cause or reasonable suspicion exists to
believe that the employee’s job performance is or could be adversely affected
as a result of being or having been under the influence of drugs or alcohol.
• Random Testing – As part of an established program 100% of all employees
are eligible. Employees tested at random may be subject to more than one
test annually.
• Post-Accident Testing – Immediately after a job-related accident, regardless
of injury to person or damage to property or degree of involvement, to confirm
or refute drug or alcohol use as a contributing cause.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace
As a condition of employment with the Company, all employees must agree to have
released to the Company the results of all substance screens and examinations,
including all documents generated.
Any persons working for or employed by the Company are prohibited from:
• Reporting to work or working while under the influence of or while impaired by
alcohol or any other drug or substance (whether or not legally “intoxicated”).
• Chemical dependence on alcohol or other drugs where job performance or
safety of employees is adversely affected.
• The use of illegal drugs. The term “illegal drugs” as used in this policy
includes, but is not limited to marijuana, cocaine, heroin and similar drugs
whose possession and use are prohibited by law, as well as prescription
drugs unless validly prescribed to the employee by their physician.
• The abuse of other substances whether available legally (such as cough
syrup, over-the-counter medication or drugs for which an employee has a
valid prescription) or never intended for human consumption (such as glue).
• The unauthorized possession, use, transfer, or sale of alcohol, illegal drugs,
narcotics and weapons on Company property or job sites whether located on
Company property or not.
• The use of legal drugs without a valid prescription, unauthorized possession,
transfer, or sale of legal drugs on Company property or job sites whether
located on Company property or not.
• Adulterating or switching of any blood, urine or any other sample submitted
for testing.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace
4.6 EMPLOYEES/CONTRACTORS
Company employees who, as a result of testing, are found to have positive levels of
illegal or unreported drugs, alcohol or other prohibited substances in his/her system,
regardless of when or where these substances entered his/her system, will be
considered in violation of this policy and subject to disciplinary action up to and
including termination.
Lease or contract personnel performing work for the Company, on or off the
premises, found in violation of this policy will be subject to removal from the
Company’s premises or other work sites. Furthermore, violation of this policy by
outside contractor employees may cause the cancellation of the contract between
the Company and the contractor.
4.7 NON-EMPLOYEES
5 DISCIPLINARY ACTION
Disciplinary action for violation of this policy may include warning letters, periodic
drug screening and suspension of employment or termination of employment.
Employees who use illegal drugs or who believe they may have a substance abuse
problem are encouraged to contact the Benefits Department. An employee, if not
otherwise subject to disciplinary actions, will not be disciplined if he/she voluntarily
asks for assistance before being requested to submit to testing. The Company may,
at its sole discretion, limit the number of occasions that treatment will be offered. Any
employee who has been permitted to return to work after obtaining treatment may be
required to submit to additional testing at regular intervals as a condition of
employment.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace
For information concerning the coverage under the Group Medical Plan Coverage
for Substance Abuse Services contact the Benefits Department.
7 EXCLUSION
8 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Drugs, Alcohol and Weapons in the Workplace
9 DOCUMENTATION
• Drugs and Narcotics Release Notice, HQS-CDV-FM 1.03
• Drug Screening Release, HQS-CDV-FM 1.06
10 REFERENCES
This Policy and Procedure are cited from HQS-HRM-PP-01. All questions and
feedback should be directed as such.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure all Company personnel are adequately
trained to perform their duties in the safest manner possible and to prevent incidents
or injuries.
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all personnel as defined by referenced Policies and Procedures
and office-based personnel who travel to facilities and installations to conduct work.
4 PROCEDURE
The HSE training requirements are detailed in the company's Worldwide and
Business Unit Training Matrices.
Training, beyond the minimum required to assist personnel in complying with the
specific HSE Policies and Procedures, is also detailed in the Company Training
Matrix.
For the purposes of this manual, Company approved training includes Unit approved
training, unless specifically stated otherwise.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training
Location of
Subject Affected Personnel Training
Principles of food-borne
All Food Handlers
illness.
Transmission of
All Catering Personnel Catering Contractor
communicable diseases
Personal hygiene All Catering Personnel
First aid for choking All Catering Personnel
Refresher training for Kitchen Hygiene
Section 3 above (At the discretion All Catering Personnel and Safety - RSTC
Subsection 3.1 of Rig Manager) Toolbox
Emergency drills/duties
Fire prevention
Fire fighting equipment
associated with the All Catering Personnel Installation Specific
galley, mess hall,
accommodation and
laundry areas
Safety Leadership
Section 4 THINK planning
All Company Personnel Training DVD –
Subsection 2.1 Process
Module 6**
Anyone prior to being Firewatcher CD-
Firewatcher Training
assigned as a Firewatcher ROM
Anyone person performing RSTC Toolbox –
Permit to Work
work that requires a PTW Permit to Work
All personnel entering confined Confined space
spaces awareness - RSTC
Confined Space
Section 4 Toolbox/Practical
Awareness
Subsection 2.2 Confined space stand-by skills – installation
person specific equipment
Proper use of the
installation or facility Responsible persons and all
specific confined space the members of the Installation Specific
rescue and retrieval Emergency Response Teams
equipment
Manufacturer
Section 4 recommendations/
Use of PPE All Company Personnel
Subsection 2.4 instructions and
Safety OJT Module
Section 4
H2S Awareness Training All Company Personnel Safety OJT Module
Subsection 3.1
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training
Location of
Subject Affected Personnel Training
Safety Leadership
Section 4
START All Company personnel Training DVD –
Subsection 5.1
Module 7**
All Company personnel who
travel to or from Company Helicopter Safety
Helicopter Safety
offshore installations by DVD-ROM
Section 4 helicopter
Subsection 5.2 All personnel driving Company
Defensive Driver vehicles and/or personal Division/Sector-
Training vehicles used for Company specific training
business
Safe working practices
Hands on training
Section 4 associated with hand All Company Personnel
provided on the rig
Subsection 5.3 tools.
Ladder Safety All Company Personnel RSTC Toolbox
Electrical OJT
Section 4 All Company personnel who
Energy Isolation Worldwide Training
Subsection 5.4 perform maintenance or repairs
Matrix
Awareness
Training - RSTC
Fall Protection Toolbox/Practical
All Company Personnel
Awareness. skills with
installation specific
equipment
Fall Protection Anyone so that one trained Unit approved
Section 4
Competent Person person is onboard at all times training
Subsection 5.5
Confined Space
Anyone so that one trained Unit approved
Rescue Competent
person is onboard at all times training
Person
Rescue From Heights Anyone so that one trained Unit approved
Competent Person person is onboard at all times training
All Company personnel that Division approved
Scaffold Training
erect scaffolding training
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training
Location of
Subject Affected Personnel Training
All Company personnel that Installation specific
Operation of winches
operate winches equipment
Any person using lifting Unit approved
Rigger Training
equipment training
All Company personnel involved
Section 4 Manriding Awareness RSTC Toolbox
in manriding activities
Subsection 5.6
Awareness - RSTC
Toolbox/Practical
All Company personnel that
Forklift Training skills-based training
operate forklifts
with installation
specific equipment
Hazardous Materials
All Company Personnel RSTC Toolbox
Awareness
Anyone so there is at least one
Section 4 Handling/Shipping of Unit approved
trained Materialsman on board
Subsection 5.7 Hazardous Materials training
at all times
Unit approved
Asbestos Awareness All Company Personnel
training
Personnel authorized by the
Electrical Safety electrical responsible person Worldwide Training
Training who perform any work on Matrix
Section 4 electrical equipment
Subsection 5.9 Manufacturer
Use of insulated tool
Instructions for
for removing persons All relevant personnel
installation specific
from live conductors
equipment
Unit approved
training that
Section 4 Training for Incident Personnel with responsibilities
supports Unit
Subsection 6.3 Analysis for incident analysis
Incident Analysis
Procedure
**The Safety Leadership Training DVD is available to personnel and supervisors as a tool
to ensure understanding of the Company’s expectations. The preferred method to utilize
this tool is supervisory led discussions and/or hands on training at the job site. It is not
intended as a computer based training module.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
ORIENTATION AND TRAINING
Training
5 RESPONSIBILITY
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that hazards are identified and risks are
effectively managed and controlled at all times.
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all personnel that work at any Company installation or facility.
All Company personnel must incorporate the THINK Planning Process into all tasks
performed, whether working individually or in teams.
4 PROCEDURE
The THINK Planning Process is utilized for Risk Management of all activities and
tasks carried out throughout the Company.
The THINK Planning Process for Risk Management consists of the following steps:
• Correctly identifying the hazards (What If?) and associated risks
(consequences and likelihood) involved in an activity or task through risk
assessment.
• Utilizing knowledge and experience to demonstrate risks are as low as
reasonably practicable (ALARP) by applying the appropriate level of risk
assessment (THINK planning level).
• Determining the controls (policies, procedures, standards and work practices)
required to ensure the risk to people, the environment and property is as low
as reasonably practicable throughout the task or activity:
1. Preventive controls – prevent an incident by reducing the likelihood an
incident will occur.
2. Mitigating controls – reduce the consequences of an incident if
preventive controls fail or are not effective.
• Communicating the risks and controls to personnel who may be affected.
• Anticipating possible deviations from the THINK plan by identifying changes,
conditions and inactions (What If?).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
Personnel must have the necessary knowledge, skills, and experience to perform
the activities or tasks assigned to them, including any activities to control risks. This
cannot be determined without a correctly developed THINK plan.
All Company personnel must be trained in the THINK Planning Process. Supervisors
must take an active role in the training to ensure effective understanding. Tools are
available to assist supervisors with training and implementation of the THINK
process on the “Transocean Safety Leadership Training” DVD Module 6. Effective
understanding of the process cannot be accomplished from employee-computer
interface. Supervisors must utilize the information from the DVD to coach, mentor
and monitor the effectiveness of their employees’ THINK plans. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3)
All THINK plans include the requirement to reduce risks to as low as reasonably
practicable. Reducing risks to as low as reasonably practicable requires personnel to
consider the various additional risk reduction measures (additional controls) and
determine if the effort and cost of those measures justify the additional amount of
risk reduction obtained.
Figure A visibly represents the levels of the THINK Planning Process available for
identifying, assessing and controlling risk through effective planning:
• THINK Planning Process - Individual
• THINK Planning Process - Verbal
• THINK Planning Process - Written
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
The THINK Planning Process includes hazard identification and provides various
levels of risk assessment to demonstrate risks are as low as reasonably practicable.
The level of risk assessment applied is dependent upon the:
• number of people involved in the assessment
• knowledge, experience, and skill of the people participating in the assessment
and developing the plan
• criticality and complexity of the task or activity
• potential negative consequences that may occur during the task or activity.
Higher levels of THINK planning used within the Company include Task Risk
Assessments (TRAs), HAZOPs/HAZIDs, Major Accident Hazard Risk Assessments
(MAHRAs), Safety Cases, and Operations Integrity Cases (OICs). These levels of
THINK planning provide a higher level of detail to ensure risks are demonstrated to
be as low as reasonably practicable. Demonstrating risks are as low as reasonably
practicable for tasks, activities and hazardous operations is accomplished through
risk assessment and effective application of controls represented by the Company
Management system and site specific work practices.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
OIC
Safety
Case
MAHRA
START
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
• Did I consider the likelihood that the negative consequences may occur?
• Even though the risk in my plan is within my risk tolerance, have I
demonstrated it to be as low as reasonably practicable?
• Do I understand what I need to do to recognize and manage change?
The START observation card can be used at the work site as a prompt to assist in
developing effective THINK plans.
When developing your THINK plan, you must follow the rules for task planning. By
following the rules of task planning, you ensure that you and your team have the
knowledge, personal experience, skill, and authority necessary to develop an
effective THINK Plan, manage change, and successfully complete your task without
incident and injury. You also determine which approach for managing change will be
applied while carrying out the THINK Plan.
The THINK Planning Process will be most widely applied at the individual THINK
plan level to assist individuals in planning what they are about to do. Individuals
must use the THINK Planning Process to Plan, Inspect, Identify, Communicate and
Control all tasks and associated hazards and risks. Individuals must apply START
monitoring during execution of the planned task in order to recognize any deviation
from the THINK plan, which may create new hazards and risks.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
The verbal THINK Planning Process is used when more than one person is involved
in a task. Joint participation in developing the THINK plan is required. Adequate
communication between the personnel involved must ensure all aspects of the
activities, tasks, risks and controls in the THINK plan are reviewed and understood.
When each person involved fully understands and agrees on the THINK plan and
the necessary controls are implemented, the task may proceed.
The written THINK plan is provided for supervisors to manage risk associated with
tasks carried out by their crew using the Rules of Task Planning and by:
• Creating experiences that provide learning opportunities.
• Ensuring their people practice effective individual and verbal THINK planning
skills on the job.
• Reinforcing the practice of hazard identification (What If?) and assessment on
the job.
• Satisfying themselves people have learned and developed necessary skills to
carry out their job in a safe and responsible manner.
• Understanding and implementing available preventive and mitigating controls.
• Identifying the hazards and assessing the risks (What If?).
• Understanding what is needed to anticipate, recognize, and manage change,
The supervisor is responsible for the quality and completion of the written THINK
plan.
The THINK Process Checklist must be utilized and completed to ensure effective
written THINK plans are created. See Figure E2.
The START observation card can be used at the work site as an additional tool to
prompt and assist in the development of written THINK plans.
If appropriate, the planning stage for development of a written THINK plan may take
place in an area other than the work site. The work site must be visited for the
Inspect, Identify, Communicate and Control stages. Visitation of the work site allows
the personnel assessing the risks and developing the plan to:
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
• Get a clear understanding of the environment including the layout of and safe
and possible unsafe conditions in the area.
• Identify hazards, actual and potential, and their consequences.
• Inspect tools and equipment in the area and those that will be or may be
required for the task.
• Communicate with people directly and indirectly involved with the planned
task who may be affected by the task.
• Make an initial plan of control measures required to be implemented for the
task, people and work area.
Task Specific THINK Procedures are utilized to execute tasks that have been
identified to have a higher level of criticality, complexity, or risk, based on the
hazards identified for the tasks within the activity. Task Specific THINK Procedures
document the safest and most effective way to perform a task, incorporating the
experience of personnel involved.
The Task Specific THINK Procedure is comprised of task steps, critical task steps or
both.
A critical task step is a task step that, if not performed correctly, can cause
significant loss (severity rating of 15 or higher, see Section 4 Subsection 6.3) and a
likelihood probability of Conceivable, Possible, or Likely. See Figure B, Risk
Classification Matrix, for results marked with “†”.
Task Specific THINK Procedures are required for all hazardous operations as
determined by the installation’s Operation Integrity Case.
All crew members involved in or affected by the task must participate in the
development of the Task Specific THINK Procedure. This assists them in identifying
hazards and incorporating controls to reduce the risk of injury or incident.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
Task Specific THINK Procedures require initial review and approval from the OIM
and final approval of the Rig Manager. This approval process is required prior to the
Task Specific THINK Procedures being included in the company management
system at the installation level (Level 3 Installation Specific Procedures),
A Task Risk Assessment is required for all exemption requests and to assess critical
task steps in Task Specific THINK Procedures. (See Section 1.5)
The Task Risk Assessment is available to provide a higher level risk assessment of
the critical task steps listed in Task Specific THINK Procedures or written THINK
plans.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
5 L M M H H† H†
PROBABILITY
4 L M M M H† H†
3 L L M M M† H†
2 L L L M M M
1 L L L L L M
A B C D E F
SEVERITY
L LOW RISK
Task may proceed and should be monitored. If possible, implement measures
to reduce the risk even further.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
H HIGH RISK
Task must not proceed. Implement and risk-assess alternative methods for
performing the task.
† TSTP Task steps with this risk require a Task Risk Assessment.
A HAZOP study is used to identify HSE hazards and operability issues for
equipment or systems to reduce risks to ALARP. HAZOPs are primarily used during
the design stage.
A HAZOP team should consist of personnel familiar with the equipment and systems
and be lead by a facilitator trained and competent in the HAZOP process.
Transocean has three processes to provide assurance that Major Hazards are
effectively managed: the Major Accident Hazard Risk Assessment (MAHRA), the
HSE (or Safety) Case, and the Operation Integrity Case (OIC). Every vessel in the
Transocean fleet must have a current version of a MAHRA, Safety Case, or OIC. As
MAHRAs and Safety/HSE Cases require review and updating, the OIC process
should be used.
A Major Accident Hazard Risk Assessment (MAHRA) shows that major hazards
have been identified, the risk associated with those hazards has been qualitatively
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
assesses and that the preventive and mitigating controls necessary to reduce the
risk to ALARP have been identified. The MAHRA identifies risks from three
perspectives: by compartment, by system, and the installation as a whole. The
MAHRA relies upon the knowledge and experience of the installation’s personnel.
A Quantitative Risk Assessment may be used as part of the Safety Case risk
assessment. Its use must be suitable and sufficient depending on the level of risk
and local requirements.
The Safety Case is used to demonstrate major HSE risks are as low as reasonably
practicable to meet regulatory requirements in the United Kingdom, Norway,
Denmark, Netherlands and Australia.
The Operation Integrity Case provides assurance that major and other workplace
hazards are identified, the risks associated with these hazards are assessed, and
that the necessary controls are in place to reduce the risk to as low as reasonably
practicable. Each identified control is assigned a responsible person. The OIC
process is based upon (and referenced to) the Company Management System, so
does not rely solely on the knowledge and experience of the personnel involved. For
further information on the OIC process see HQS-HSE-ST-01.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 SUPERVISORS:
• Ensure their crews are trained in the use of the THINK Planning Process.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
• Be responsible for the quality and use of the THINK plans created by their
crews.
• Lead the THINK Planning Process daily.
• Participate in the development and continuous review of Task Specific THINK
Procedures.
• Participate in development and review of Task Risk Assessments (TRAs).
• Ensure appropriate Company Management System Procedures are correctly
implemented and applied (preventive and mitigating controls) in THINK plans.
5.3 OIM:
• Review Task Specific THINK Procedures to identify critical tasks and
determine if a Task Risk Assessment is required to demonstrate the risks are
as low as reasonably practicable.
• Review Task Specific THINK Procedures, offer initial approval and submit to
Rig Manager for final approval.
• Review and approve THINK Task Risk Assessments and those related to
Exemption and forward to the Rig Manager for approval.
• Monitor the participation and use of THINK planning on the installation.
• Ensure appropriate Company Management System Procedures are correctly
implemented and applied (preventive and mitigating controls) in THINK plans.
• Ensure that a list detailing personnel responsible for HSE critical activities is
documented, maintained and communicated.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
6 DOCUMENTATION
The forms indicated below are included in the manual and are not to be modified
from their original format. These forms have been developed by Corporate HSE
Services and are a requirement of this policy. These forms must be reproduced and
made available to all installations/facilities by their Division/Unit offices. Forward any
suggested improvements to these forms using the HSE Feedback form.
• Written THINK Plan (Figure E1)
(Must be filed in the installation/facility files for at least 90 days.)
• THINK Process Checklist (Figure E2)
(Must be filed in the installation/facility files for at least 90 days.)
The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples
are not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of
the examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Task Specific THINK Procedure (Figure F)
(Copies must be made available to personnel and retained until newer
procedures or assessments supercede them.)
• Task Risk Assessment Worksheet - Front (Figure G1)
(Copies must be made available to personnel and retained until newer
procedures or assessments supercede them.)
• Task Risk Assessment Worksheet – Back (Figure G2)
(Copies must be made available to personnel and retained until newer
procedures or assessments supercede them.)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 16 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 18 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
THINK Planning Process
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
1 POLICY
All installations and facilities must have a Permit to Work system in place that
safely controls hazardous operations.
All personnel must be trained prior to using the Permit to Work system.
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that authorized personnel, who are
knowledgeable of the hazardous operation to be performed, have planned the work,
inspected the work site, identified the hazards and communicated the suitable
control measures to be taken to prevent the occurrence of an incident using the
Permit to Work System.
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all personnel who work at any Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
A Permit to Work is not required for every job. Consider other forms of control
measures, such as the THINK Planning Process, Energy Isolations, and so on
before generating a permit.
4.1 GENERAL
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
• Ensure the OIM or designee is fully aware of and approves the work to be
done.
• Provide a record showing the type of work and indicate that a responsible
person is assigned.
• Provide a procedure for determining times when work must be suspended.
• Provide procedures for other activities that may interact.
• Provide a formal hand-over procedure if work overlaps a shift change.
• Provide a formal hand-back procedure to ensure that any part of the
installation affected by the work is returned to a safe condition and ready for
reinstatement.
• Provide a central display of open or suspended permits.
4.3 VALIDITY
The maximum validity of any Permit to Work is 24 hours. If the work is not complete
within 24 hours, close the existing Permit to Work and initiate a new one following all
steps listed in this procedure.
Hazardous operations that require a permit include, but are not limited to, the
following situations:
Hot work includes welding and oxygen/acetylene cutting, electrical work, grinding
(fixed or portable), needle gunning and all work using other types of ignition sources.
With regards to hot work, hazardous operations that require a permit include but are
not limited to:
• Welding and oxygen/acetylene cutting anywhere on the installation except in
the approved designated safe welding area.
• All hot work in any designated hazardous area or in any area where an
explosive gas mixture is likely to occur in normal operations.
• Any time an electrical apparatus cannot be made dead (for any reason) and is
considered hazardous to life.
• All use of open flames such as burning garbage or use of an outdoor cooking
grill.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
As a minimum, the THINK planning process must be used for all other hot work to
determine if a Permit to Work is required or what other controls need to be put in
place.
Due to the risk of fires or explosions during hot work, ALL alternative methods of
accomplishing the job must be considered prior to hot work being authorized.
Aspects that must be considered during any hot work include at least the following:
• Well operations or situations, well testing, and simultaneous operations.
• Back sides of walls, bulkheads, decks, floors, deck heads, and ceilings.
• Areas adjacent to the work, such as fuel tanks or paint lockers.
• Combustible materials stored in the area (must be removed or protected).
• Vapors present or generated by the hot work.
A system must be in place so that all hot work is suspended and relevant ignition
sources confirmed shut down when circumstances dictate.
Hot work must not be performed on any drum or other container that previously
contained hazardous materials.
All designated safe welding areas must be approved by the Division Manager.
Adequate ventilation must be provided for fumes and dust generated by welding and
cutting operations. If adequate ventilation cannot be accomplished, suitable
respiratory protection must be worn.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
When welding or cutting, the welder must wear appropriate clothing/PPE, including:
• Welding shield and hardhat combined, or a hand-held shield and a hard hat
with suitably shaded transparent eyepiece approved for welding.
• Shaded eye protection when cutting.
• Dry leather welding gloves.
• Leather aprons (where appropriate).
• A long sleeve garment approved by the manufacturer as suitable for welding.
• Heat resistant, Kevlar or similar material Company approved full-body
harness, when required. Shock absorbing lanyards must be protected from
sparks and slag while in use during welding or cutting operations.
Screens or other effective means must be used to protect persons who may be
exposed to harmful radiation or sparks from electric arc welding.
Welder's assistants and fire watchers must take adequate precautions to protect
against welding flash.
B. FIREWATCHER
Only personnel who have satisfactorily completed the Company Firewatcher OJT in
the Safety OJT Module can be authorized by the OIM to be assigned as a
firewatcher. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
• Assist the welder in inspecting and preparing the work site before beginning
work.
• Ensure that adequate fire-fighting equipment is readily available and
familiarize themselves with its operation and what to do in the event of a fire.
• Sign the Permit to Work before beginning the work.
• Continually monitor the work site and adjacent areas for hazards that may
affect the welder or that are created by the hot work.
• Remain at the site for a suitable length of time after the welder has completed
his assignment, watching for any indication of burning or smoldering.
• Inspect and re-inspect the site where possible smoldering may occur for a
minimum of 30 minutes after completion of any welding or cutting operation.
• Notify the welder of intention to leave the work area so that a hand-over of
responsibility to a suitable replacement can be carried out.
• Take adequate precautions to protect against welding flash.
Confined spaces are defined as a tank, mud pit, tunnel or similar spaces where
there is a danger of explosion, lack of oxygen or the presence of toxic gases. All
spaces that are not normally lit, not normally ventilated and not normally manned are
also considered confined spaces.
All reasonable and practicable options to perform the task that do not require
confined space entry must be ruled out and controls must be in place before
proceeding.
A Permit to Work must be completed for any confined space or tank entry and a
copy must be posted outside the area to be entered.
A. TRAINING
Any personnel entering confined spaces must be trained in the hazards of confined
space entry and use of the equipment that must be utilized. This training (See
Section 4 Subsection 1.3) and practical demonstration must be given in a formal
manner and fully documented.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
Responsible persons and the Emergency Response Teams must be trained and
exercised in the proper use of the installation or facility specific confined space
rescue and retrieval equipment. The training and drills must be documented. (See
Section 4 Subsection 3.2)
B. EQUIPMENT
Before completely removing the fastening devices on a confined space, the internal
pressure must be checked and vented if necessary.
The atmosphere must be sampled for oxygen levels and combustible gas using a
portable gas detector. If levels of toxic, inert, or combustible gases or oxygen are
detected that present dangerous and hazardous conditions, the area must not be
entered until measures have been taken that render the space safe.
All equipment used for testing purposes must be maintained and calibrated.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
Persons who are competent should carry out testing. Those carrying out the testing
should also be capable of interpreting the results and taking any necessary action.
Testing must be conducted for each re-entry.
There are substantial risks if the concentration of oxygen in the atmosphere varies
significantly from normal, 20.9%. For example, oxygen enrichment increases
flammability of clothing and other combustible materials. Oxygen deficiency induces
impairment to personnel.
Atmosphere below 19.5% or above 22% oxygen by volume must not be entered
except for emergency rescue purposes and then only when personnel are equipped
with positive pressure respirators.
A stand-by person must be assigned and clearly identified for any confined space
entry. A stand-by person must have no other duties while so assigned.
Only personnel who have satisfactorily completed the Company's confined space
awareness training can be authorized by the OIM to be assigned as a stand-by
person. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
The stand-by person is responsible for carrying out the following duties:
• Assist the competent person to sample the atmosphere for oxygen and
combustible gas levels.
• Ensure adequate rescue equipment is readily available and familiarize
themselves with its operation and what to do in the event of an emergency.
• Sign the Permit to Work before beginning work.
• Remain at the confined space entry site while any personnel are inside.
• Continually monitor the confined space entrance and adjacent areas for
hazards that may affect the personnel working in the confined space.
• Prevent unauthorized entry.
• Maintain contact with a manned control point (control room, radio room, and
so on) and with the personnel in the confined space.
• Maintain a tally of the persons inside the confined space.
• Notify the person in charge of carrying out the work of their intention to leave
the work area, so that a hand over of responsibility to a suitable replacement
can be carried out.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
• Immediately raise the alarm if there are indications (through the agreed
system of communication or otherwise) of the personnel within the confined
space being negatively affected by the atmosphere. After raising the alarm,
under no circumstances should the stand-by person stationed at the entrance
attempt to enter the confined space before additional help has arrived.
For all confined space entries, sounding must be done before entering. In case of a
doubtful sounding or suspected presence of fluid that presents a drowning hazard,
personnel must wear a floatation device.
The time of opening or closing a confined space and entry or exit of personnel must
be recorded at the manned control point (control room, radio room, and so on.).
Air movers or blowers must be used for venting and to provide a continuous supply
of fresh air while the work is in progress, unless sufficient airflow is obtained through
a free flow process. Air movers or blowers must be installed in such a position that
the fresh air intakes do not draw in fumes or vapors.
Provisions must be made for ready exits and entrances. Tanks, vessels or other
confined spaces having openings or manholes in the side as well as in the top must
be entered from the side when practicable. The use of a safety line to indicate the
direct route to and from the work site must be considered.
Fuel tanks and crude oil tanks must not be entered without Rig Manager approval.
When working in confined spaces, all pipelines discharging into that space must be
closed with blind flanges, plugs or valves and energy isolation signs and tags
posted. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.4)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
There must be at least two rescue team personnel in the confined space and one
rescue team person outside the confined space equipped with approved respiratory
equipment for all rescue situations in a confined space requiring respiratory
equipment.
In addition to the above and the hot work procedures, (See 4.4.1) personnel must
adhere to the following procedures.
One of the highest risks from using gas within a confined space is the accumulation
of gas due to leakage from the cylinders or hoses. To reduce this risk, gas cylinders
should not be taken into confined spaces. Where it is necessary to take gas
cylinders into confined spaces, periodic gas checks must be made in the vicinity of
the cylinders and always prior to recommencing work after a break. The cylinders
must be removed immediately on completion of the task.
When hoses are run into a confined space from gas cylinders outside the confined
space, all hoses and fittings must be disconnected from the gas cylinders or
removed from the confined space during extended breaks.
All work carried out over open water, outside the handrails and anywhere there is a
danger of falling into the sea.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
A Task Specific THINK Procedure must be developed and utilized when performing
this task.
Any time explosives are removed from their certified shipping containers.
Any time radioactive materials are removed from their certified shipping containers.
4.4.8 DIVING
All manned diving operations carried out from the installation or where there is an
interface between manned diving operations and the installation.
Work that affects the state of readiness of the installation's critical safety systems.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
Work involving the cutting, drilling or other disturbance of material that contains
asbestos.
Work involving the use of slings made of synthetic fiber may be carried out in special
cases (for example, lifting of chromium pipes, special drill pipe, engine cylinder
heads, and so on).
All work involved in the mixing and/or pumping of concentrated acid and other such
dangerous liquids.
At the discretion of the OIM a Permit to Work may be required for certain complex
operations.
All work requiring the opening or potential opening of any overboard dump valve.
4.4.17 OTHER
Other work not covered by the previously mentioned situations where the OIM, a
supervisor or any risk assessment identifies the requirement of a Permit to Work to
control risks.
Any work where equipment that is not intrinsically safe is used in a hazardous area.
For example: PDA, flash light, camera and so on.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
A copy of the Permit to Work form must be displayed at the work site.
Reactivation of the work must take place only after the responsible person confirms
that all the control measures are in place.
When a permit is to be carried over to another shift, both the responsible person and
the person in charge of the work must ensure that the work is understood and the
control measures are in place. The OIM and OIM Designee must ensure they are
aware of all open permits at commencement of their daily tour.
If the responsible person or the person in charge of the work change, both must sign
the permit confirming that the work is understood and the controls are in place.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Two different signatures must always be on the Permit to Work. The same person
must not sign as both the Responsible Person and the Person in Charge of the
Work. This does not exclude the OIM or designee from acting as the Responsible
Person.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
5.4 FIREWATCHER:
• Satisfactorily complete the Company fire watch training before being
authorized by the OIM to be assigned as a firewatcher.
• Perform no other duties while assigned as Firewatcher.
• Wear long sleeves made of a flame retardant material.
• Assist the welder in inspecting and preparing the work site before beginning
work.
• Ensure that adequate fire-fighting equipment is readily available and
familiarize themselves with its operation and what to do in the event of a fire.
• Sign the Permit to Work before beginning the work.
• Continually monitor the work site and adjacent areas for hazards that may
affect the welder or that are created by the hot work.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
• Remain at the site for a suitable length of time after the welder has completed
his assignment, observing for any indication of burning or smoldering.
• Inspect and re-inspect the site where possible smoldering may occur for a
minimum of 30 minutes after completion of any welding or cutting operations.
• Notify the welder of intention to leave the work area so that a hand-over of
responsibility to a suitable replacement can be carried out.
• Take adequate precautions to protect against welding flash.
5.6 OIM:
• Determine if a Permit to Work is an additional requirement when an isolation
certificate is issued for maintenance or repair of a system or component
containing energy.
• Ensure all other reasonable and practicable options not requiring confined
space entry, have been ruled out and controls which reduce the risks to as
low as reasonably practicable are in place before signing the Permit to Work
and approving the confined space entry.
• Ensure all reasonable control measures have been or will be carried out
before signing the Permit to Work and approving the work to be carried out.
• Ensure permits for work activities that may interact or affect one another are
clearly cross-referenced.
• Ensure a copy of the permit is displayed at the work site until work has been
completed.
• Ensure a system is in place to monitor the effectiveness of this procedure by
selected auditing, inspection and testing of in-force work permits.
• Sign the permit to indicate satisfaction with the condition in which the
operation was completed or not completed and confirming the permit is no
longer in effect. The OIM must record on the permit the time and date the
permit was closed out. NOTE: This responsibility may not be delegated to
a designee.
• Assign a permit system administrator and inform the work force who was
selected.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
• Ensure personnel are trained prior to using the Permit to Work system.
• Authorize personnel who have satisfactorily completed the Company's
confined space training to be assigned as a stand-by person.
• Authorize personnel who have satisfactorily completed the Company's fire
watch training to be assigned as a firewatcher.
• Authorize personnel to use welding or oxygen/acetylene cutting equipment.
• Ensure all welding performed on structural members, high-pressure lines and
lifting appliances is performed only by an appropriately certified (coded)
welder.
6 DOCUMENTATION
The form (Figure A) is included in the manual as an example only and is intended to
allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to create their
own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not used exactly
as it is included; the form used must include the key elements of the example and
must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Permit to Work form (Figure A)
(The original copy of all permits must be retained on the installation for at
least 12 months.)
NOTE: Each Permit to Work system must have the ability to assign a unique
number to each Permit to Work form for cross-referencing.
• Confined Space Entry Checklist (Figure B)
(Must be retained in installation/facility files for a period of one year.)
• Firewatcher's THINK Checklist (Figure C)
(Completed checklist must be retained in installation or facility files for 90
days.)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 16 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 18 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Permit to Work
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 19
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment
1 POLICY
Only equipment authorized by the OIM or the OIM's designee may be installed
or operated on the installation or facility.
2 PURPOSE
To ensure that the HSE interface of all Company operations involving clients, any
subcontractor personnel and equipment are effectively managed to identify hazards
and control risks.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees; HSE policies, standards and procedures; and
equipment of any client, contractor or outside agency that work at any Company
installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
Any client, contractor or outside agency personnel that work at any Company
installation or facility must be encouraged to take an active part in the Company
THINK, START and FOCUS Processes.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment
Qualified personnel must inspect the equipment and complete a checklist relevant
for the equipment for the OIM’s or designee’s approval.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.4 OIM:
• Give prior approval to the placement, installation and operation of any client
or subcontractor equipment.
• Inform Company onshore management of client or subcontractor
equipment/personnel found to be unsatisfactory.
• Report any unsatisfactory items to the client or subcontractor representative.
• Ensure any certification required for personnel or equipment is valid. (For
example: Coded Welding, EX Equipment, Pressure Test, Equipment
inspectors, hazardous materials handling, and so on).
6 DOCUMENTATION
The form indicated below is included in the manual as an example only and is
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not
used exactly as it is included; the form used must include the key elements of the
example and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Approval To Install And Operate Client And Subcontractor Equipment
(Figure A)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Client and Subcontractor Personnel and Equipment
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 5
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all personnel are adequately protected
from environmental elements and relevant workplace hazards where it is not
practical to reduce relevant exposure to acceptable levels by using engineering
control or practices.
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all personnel that work at Company installations and facilities.
4 PROCEDURE
4.2 TRAINING
Business Unit management must ensure personnel are trained in the use of PPE.
The training must cover both theory and practice on the PPE to be used. The
training must be based on the recommendations and instructions supplied by the
manufacturer. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
Hard hats must be worn by all personnel outside the accommodation at all times
except in designated areas approved by the Division Manager. These areas must be
clearly marked to indicate that a hard hat is not required.
Hard hats must be secured when working two meters or more above the deck, or as
conditions dictate. Hard hats must be:
• Fitted with a means of securing, such as chinstrap or hearing protectors.
• Designed so as not to prevent wearing ear muffs and/or a face shield.
• Made of non-conductive material and worn as recommended by the
manufacturer.
• Discarded if the shell of the hard hat is damaged.
Hard hat suspension must be adjusted to fit the wearer and not modified.
The company hard hat color designation to identify visitors and employees new to
the installation is:
• Bright orange or international orange – visitors and Short Service Employees
• White – all other Company personnel
The appropriate hearing protection must be worn in designated high noise areas,
which exceed 83 dB. These areas must be clearly marked.
Hearing protection must be placed at the entrance of high noise areas to ensure that
all persons who enter have hearing protection available.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment
All personnel must wear approved safety glasses, complete with approved side
shields, when outside the accommodation, except in designated areas approved by
the Division Manager. These areas must be clearly marked to indicate that safety
glasses are not required.
Prescription safety glasses must have approved side shields securely fitted or
permanently attached.
The wearing of contact lenses is permitted except as follows: in areas of dust and
fumes; when wearing breathing apparatus; by people performing or assisting with
welding operations.
Appropriate clothing that ensures personal safety and protects an individual from the
elements must be worn. All clothing must be Unit approved.
No jewelry may be worn while working. This includes finger rings, pierced or clasp
earrings, studs and rings worn in face or body piercings, tongue piercings, metal
watch straps, necklaces, chains, or medallions. The only exception is for non-
conductive watches and non-conductive medical alert tags.
• Slicker suits must be worn when personnel might be exposed to hazards that
coveralls do not give adequate protection from such as oil-based mud,
completion fluids, heavy rain, and so on.
• Sleeveless garments are not permitted in the galley or mess areas.
• Loose clothing that can be caught in machinery must not be worn.
• Safety and health risks associated with long hair must be controlled by use of
hairnets and so on.
• Aprons or protective suits must be worn when handling corrosive or harmful
products.
• Work vests or other floatation devices must be worn when working over
water.
4.6.1 COVERALLS
Reflective tape must be affixed to coveralls and two-piece work clothing to enhance
visibility in low-light circumstances. Placement is usually across each shoulder, on
the lower arms and on the lower part of the legs.
Work vests used in conjunction with full body harnesses must be compatible to
ensure the “D” ring connection will not be fouled.
Gloves (cloth, rubber, leather, and so on) must be worn to protect the hands,
dependent upon the exposure.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment
All Company personnel must wear lace-up safety toe boots when outside the
accommodation area, except in designated areas approved by the Division
Manager. These areas must be clearly marked to indicate that safety toe boots are
not required in this area.
All other personnel must wear safety toe boots or shoes when outside the
accommodation area unless in designated areas approved by the Division Manager.
For ankle protection, safety boots are preferred to shoes.
All Company personnel with Emergency Response duties and those whose job
requires the periodic use of a full-face SCBA mask or half mask respirator must take
an annual fit test using the type of respirator to be worn, according to the
manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure an adequate seal is achieved. This test must
be documented.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment
At least two of the Installation’s 30-minute SCBAs must have voice communication
capability.
All Company personnel with Emergency Response duties and those who might use
facial seal respirator for escape purposes in emergencies must maintain facial hair in
such a way that allows a proper facial seal.
Employees are not permitted to wear contact lenses or glasses with temple pieces
when using a pressurized full-face respirator.
A system must be in place to record the entry and expected time of exit of personnel
using SCBAs in hazardous or oxygen deficient areas.
Air used to supply visors, hoods, etc., must be tested prior to use to ensure
compliance with Grade D air requirements.
Air used to supply visors, hoods, etc., must continuously meet the requirements of
Grade D or higher.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment
Grade D air, or higher, must be used for all breathing apparatus (for example,
SCBAs, air line respirators, and so on). The air must be tested monthly and the
results recorded in the planned maintenance system.
All breathing air compressors must be equipped with necessary safety devices and
be able to be run by emergency power. Compressors must be constructed, designed
and located to avoid entry of contaminated air into the system.
Suitable in-line air purifying absorbent beds and filters must be installed to ensure
good breathing air quality.
Grade D air meets the following minimum acceptable quality standards as follows:
Breathing air line couplings must not be compatible with outlets for other gas
systems, to prevent inadvertent attachment of air line respirators with harmful gases
or oxygen.
Areas requiring that PPE be available include but are not limited to:
• Work shops
• Chemical mixing areas
• Machinery spaces
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment
• Moon pool
• Rig floor
HAV is vibration that reaches the hands when working with hand held power tools,
hand guided machinery, or when holding materials being processed by machinery.
Regular exposure to HAV can cause a range of permanent injuries to hands and
arms, known as hand-arm vibration syndrome (HAVS).
When planning tasks that utilize equipment with potential to cause HAV, the hazards
must be identified and the risk reduced. The factors that must be considered include:
• Can the task be performed without the use of vibrating tools
• Are there tools available with vibration control built in
• Control length of exposure by rotating personnel during task
• Amount of force exerted on the equipment to complete the task
• Condition and maintenance of equipment used
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 OIM:
• Authorize competent personnel to maintain critical PPE.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
RISK MANAGEMENT
Dress Requirements and Personal Protective Equipment
• Ensure all personnel with Emergency Response duties, and those whose job
requires the periodic use of a full face SCBA mask or half mask respirator
receive an annual fit test using the type of respirator to be worn.
• Ensure a system is in place to record the entry and expected time of exit of
personnel using SCBAs in hazardous or oxygen deficient areas.
• Ensure PPE is available in a sufficient quantity to meet the needs of the
personnel.
• Ensure people are trained in the use of PPE
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Hydrogen Sulfide
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to protect all personnel on an installation from the
potentially lethal effects of H2S gas.
3 SCOPE
4 PROCEDURE
H2S is a highly toxic, colorless (transparent) gas that can paralyze the respiratory
system and kill within minutes. Being heavier than air, H2S tends to accumulate in
lower areas. Mud pit areas are particularly hazardous. If H2S is heated sufficiently, it
will rise. H2S has an odor of rotten eggs, but it quickly destroys the sense of smell,
leading to a false sense of security. Disappearance of the smell after it has first been
noticed may be due to an increase rather than a decrease in concentration.
An H2S contingency plan must be in place and provide clear instructions as to what
actions are to be taken in the event of an H2S emergency whether the installation is
working at an open location or in close proximity to a fixed platform that may
potentially release H2S. In the case of a fixed platform, a contingency plan that
outlines the simultaneous operations and associated H2S risks should be developed
between the client and the installation.
Adequate fixed H2S detection devices must be located in key areas on the
installation, and set to alarm at 5-PPM low level and 10-PPM high level.
Each installation must be equipped with a minimum of two portable H2S gas
detectors.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Hydrogen Sulfide
A H2S contingency plan must be in place and provide clear instructions as to what
actions are to be taken in the event of an H2S emergency whether the installation is
working at an open location or in close proximity to a fixed platform that may
potentially release H2S. In the case of a fixed platform, a contingency plan that
outlines the simultaneous operations and associated H2S risks should be developed
between the client and the installation.
Adequate fixed H2S detection devices must be located in key areas on the
installation, and set to alarm at 5-ppm low level and 10-ppm high level.
Each installation must be equipped with a minimum of two portable H2S gas
detectors.
Every person on the installation must be trained to know the dangers of H2S gas,
and must be instructed on the use, function, and location of safety equipment before
drilling into a zone suspected to contain H2S. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
The client is to ensure, prior to drilling into a zone suspected to contain H2S, that
H2S equipment is available onboard (installed and tested), and that all personnel are
refresher-trained, know the site specific dangers of H2S related to the well and have
been instructed in the proper use of required PPE.
The client must provide adequate resources (fixed and portable PPE, training on the
use of PPE, appropriate stand-by vessels, and so on) are allocated and in place
before drilling into a zone suspected to contain H2S.
All personnel must be fit tested with all H2S PPE onboard while drilling in a zone
suspected to contain H2S.
A HSE Meeting must be held before drilling into a zone suspected to contain H2S.
Emergency Response Team members must undergo practical refresher training with
specific focus on the treatment of H2S poisoning.
If the well plan includes the possibility of working in an H2S environment of 20-ppm
or higher, a system capable of supplying sufficient breathing air for extended periods
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Hydrogen Sulfide
must be supplied. This system must include provisions for disconnection and
escape, such as a cascade system.
All personnel must successfully complete a full-faced respirator fit test, according to
the manufacturer’s instructions, to ensure an adequate seal is achieved. This test
must be documented.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.3 OIM:
• Ensure an H2S contingency plan is in place and provides clear instructions as
to what actions are to be taken in the event of an H2S emergency.
• When H2S is anticipated in the well, ensure a sufficient quantity of self-
contained breathing apparatuses (SCBAs) is available for all personnel on
board.
• Ensure inspection and approve client subcontractor equipment prior to
installation. (See Section 4 Subsection 2.3)
• Ensure emergency drills are conducted as required. (See Section 4
Subsection 3.2)
• Assist the client by making accommodation for client subcontractor personnel
to install equipment and conduct initial/refresher training on the installation.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Hydrogen Sulfide
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 4
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to reduce the impact of potential emergencies to human
life, the environment, Company property and the Company reputation.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
Each installation, facility and office must develop and maintain emergency response
and recovery plans and procedures for relevant site-specific and area or location
emergencies. Emergency Response Manuals must be reviewed annually and
updated as required, or if an installation changes location, or geographical area.
4.2 SECURITY
Each installation, facility, and office must develop and maintain prevention,
contingency and security response plans for issues involving security. As a
minimum, the Emergency Response manual must include procedures to prevent
and mitigate security hazards associated with the following:
• Environmental activists
• Piracy
• Airport reception / journey management
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response
• Labor Dispute
• Bomb Threat
• Extortion
• Missing / kidnapped person
• Civil disputes
• Country evacuation
Additional drills to address specific risks (for example, shallow gas or well test) must
be conducted before beginning the relevant operation.
The Onshore Emergency Response Team must hold a drill at least every 6 months
with at least one installation to test the integration of the Onshore and an Offshore
Emergency Response System.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response
All personnel must wear proper clothing for emergency response drills. At minimum,
this must include:
• long trousers
• shirts (long-sleeved recommended)
• substantial shoes
The OIM is responsible to ensure that hard hats, safety boots and safety glasses are
worn where required to reduce the risk of injury to involved personnel.
NOTE: Shorts, vests (sleeveless shirts), and opened-toed sandals are not
allowed.
All installations must have a system in place detailing personnel on board at all
times. This system must be updated daily or as changes occur and include the
following as a minimum:
• arrivals and departures
• a total count of all personnel on board
• primary and secondary lifeboat assignments for all personnel
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 OIM:
• Ensure effective emergency drills are held within the required time intervals.
• Ensure hard hats, safety boots and safety glasses are worn where required
during drill and exercise procedures to reduce the risk of injury to involved
personnel.
• Ensure a system is in place to detail personnel on board at all times.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response
6 DOCUMENTATION
The form indicated below is included as an alternate in the event it is not possible to
record Emergency Drills within GRS.
• Emergency Drill Report (Figure A)
(When completed, retain in the installation or facility files for one year.)
The form indicated below is included in the manual as an example only and is
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not
used exactly as included, the form used must include the key elements of the
example and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Emergency Response Exercise Sheet (Figure B)
(When completed, retain in the installation or facility files for one year.)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
PLANNING
Emergency Response
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that all personnel are adequately informed of
HSE issues, improving awareness and HSE performance.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
HSE information must be distributed to all installations and facilities and made
available to all personnel. Relevant HSE information must be translated and printed
in the predominant local language.
Corporate HSE Services must provide a Monthly Incident Rate Chart to all Company
installations and facilities.
The Monthly Incident Rate Chart provides a statistical comparison within the
Company.
The incident rate will be a Year-to-Date and 12-month rolling recordable rate.
After receiving the Monthly Incident Rate Chart, crew supervisors must study and
review the chart with their crew during their next Weekly Departmental HSE Meeting.
The Monthly Incident Rate Chart must be posted for personnel to review.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
At the discretion of the Unit QHSE department, bulletins are issued to inform all
personnel of serious incidents. All personnel should review the bulletins, which
contain only factual information based on the related incident report. Incidents
resulting in a potential severity of seven or greater should be considered for a
bulletin. (See Section 4 Subsection 6.3 for assignment of severity value) Serious
Incident Bulletins may be followed by an HSE Alert.
Corporate HSE Alerts are developed and issued to advise all personnel of an
immediate danger. An alert must be immediately distributed to all installations and
facilities and urgently acted upon.
HSE Alerts must be developed from facts gathered during the fact-finding of the
incident.
All HSE Alerts issued by Unit management must be submitted to Corporate HSE
Services for consideration for global application. Only Corporate HSE Services
issues/distributes HSE Alerts globally.
Crewmembers must review the alert and discuss corrective and preventive actions
that might be taken to prevent a similar situation from occurring on their installation
or facility.
The OIM must use the FOCUS Improvement Process to confirm that appropriate
action has been taken to cover the risk identified by the alert. The alert must be
posted on the QHSE bulletin board and files a copy in a permanent reading
file/binder for future reference and review.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
All installations and facilities must use internationally recognized pictogram signs,
according to the Company safety signs standard (see HQS-OPS-TIB-708-01), to
convey HSE critical information, such as PPE requirements, hazards, escape routes,
emergency equipment, etc.
Temporary barriers for specific hazards must be erected when needed and clearly
identified, then removed after the area is safe.
Areas where restrictions on access or equipment apply must be mapped and the
map must be available on all installations and facilities. Examples include high noise
areas, ignition source zones (explosion-proof equipment only), lighting, authorized
personnel only, and so on.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
All installations and facilities must have and maintain an up-to-date QHSE bulletin
board that is accessible to all personnel.
All installations must have an organizational chart showing the OIM and the
management/supervisory team. The chart must be accessible by all personnel.
Each installation must have an effective system in place that ensures critical
information is communicated in writing and understood throughout the working day.
This must include reference to Operations Manual, Permit to Work, isolations,
restricted areas, other work on the installation, and so on. These daily
communications must include:
• Standing Instructions for Drillers
• Standing Instructions for Crane Operators
• Formal shift hand-over report/logbook for all supervisors, issued at each shift
change
4.11 FEEDBACK
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 SUPERVISORS:
• Study and review the Monthly Incident Rate Chart with their crew during the
next Weekly Departmental HSE Meeting.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
5.3 OIM:
• Ensure the Monthly Incident Rate Chart is posted for personnel to review.
• Use the FOCUS Improvement Process to confirm that appropriate action has
been taken to cover the risk identified by HSE Alerts.
• Ensure relevant HSE Alerts are posted on the QHSE bulletin board and a
copy filed in a permanent reading file/binder for future reference and review.
• Ensure an effective system is in place that ensures critical information is
communicated and understood throughout the working day.
• Ensure an organizational chart showing the OIM and the management /
supervisory team is accessible by all personnel.
6 DOCUMENTATION
The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Information
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 14
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all personnel that work at any Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
4.1 MEETINGS
All HSE meetings must be documented and attendance sheets signed by all
personnel attending. The OIM and Rig Manager must review and sign each meeting
report and ensure appropriate action identified in the meeting is addressed using the
FOCUS Improvement Process. Depending on the resources required to implement
the improvement/corrective opportunity, utilization of the FOCUS tracking software
may also be required.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings
The documented meeting report must be available for review by all personnel and a
copy kept on file.
Crew supervisors are responsible for ensuring that effective HSE meetings are
conducted.
Department heads are responsible to ensure that all personnel within their
department attend at least one departmental HSE meeting per week. These
meetings can be conducted with another department. It is both department heads’
responsibility to ensure that the joint meeting is effective for all attending personnel.
Company subcontractors must attend and participate in relevant HSE meetings.
The list below suggests topics that should be discussed during meetings:
• Welcoming new crewmembers.
• Announcing individual HSE performance and recognition.
• Teaching the THINK and START process (individually and together)
(Management of Change) and FOCUS process as well as the complete HSE
system in an organized manner.
• Reviewing THINK plans, START observations and status of FOCUS
improvement and corrective opportunities.
• Reviewing HSE Alerts and Advisories.
• Demonstrating the correct use of tools and equipment.
• Identifying hazards.
• Discussing recent near hits and incidents.
• Reviewing the Monthly Incident Rate Chart.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings
The OIM must give full consideration to conducting a general HSE meeting on a
periodic basis. General HSE meetings must be used for issues that apply to all
personnel, such as HSE performance recognition, incident status (Unit, Division,
Sector, Branch, installation or facility), and significant change to normal routines.
Pre-tour meetings must be part of the hand-over process to ensure that all personnel
starting work are aware of the current operation and their particular responsibilities.
Specific meetings must be held prior to certain tasks being conducted. The formality
and content of the meetings depends on the exact nature of the task to be
conducted. The person who has direct operational responsibility for the proposed
operation must ensure that an effective pre-task meeting is conducted.
For more complex or non-routine operations (for example, spud, rig move or well
test), a suitable meeting format must be adopted.
All department heads or their designees, together with the OIM, must attend a joint,
daily operation meeting, to discuss each department’s plans for the next 24 hours.
Unit, Division, Sector, facility, and Corporate QHSE Steering Committee Meetings
must be conducted at least twice a year. Installation QHSE Steering Committee
Meetings must be conducted at specific times so that each crew has the opportunity
to attend a meeting per year. Annual HSE goals must be reviewed during Corporate,
Unit, Division, Sector, Branch installation and facility QHSE Steering Committee
Meetings to determine HSE performance gaps and identify improvement/corrective
opportunities (if any) to be addressed.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings
Current QHSE Steering Committee meeting minutes must be posted on the QHSE
bulletin board.
All other aspects of QHSE Steering Committees are addressed in the Organization
and Responsibility section. (See Section 2 Subsection 2)
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 SUPERVISORS:
• Ensure effective HSE meetings are conducted.
5.5 OIM:
• Encourage Client and all client subcontractor personnel to participate in
relevant HSE meetings.
• Review and validate (within GRS) each meeting report and ensure
appropriate action identified in the meeting is addressed using the FOCUS
improvement process.
• Give full consideration to conducting a general HSE meeting on a periodic
basis.
• Conduct the Daily Operation meeting.
• Conduct QHSE Steering Committee Meetings at specified intervals.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings
6 DOCUMENTATION
The form indicated below is included as an alternate in the event it is not possible to
record HSE Meetings within GRS.
• HSE Meeting Report (Figure A)
(Must be retained in installation or facility files for a minimum of three years.)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
COMMUNICATION
HSE Meetings
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 6
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process
1 POLICY
The START Process must be used to observe and monitor work practices,
plans and workplace conditions.
2 PURPOSE
3 SCOPE
4 PROCEDURE
The START process must be actively led by all supervisors and supported by all
Company personnel.
All Company personnel are responsible for their own safety and behavior. All
Company personnel are obligated to interrupt any unsafe operation and correct any
at-risk/unsafe behavior or unsafe condition.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process
4.1 GENERAL
SEE with total focus and observe for safe and at-risk/unsafe behavior and
conditions. Recognize safe behavior and reinforce it with effective feedback, treating
each person on an individual basis. Correct at-risk/unsafe behavior and conditions
immediately, in a constructive manner. Understand the colors of the person you are
relating to and treat them as THEY NEED to be treated.
THINK about what you see. Think "what if?" to anticipate and recognize change.
What can happen as a result of the change, condition or inaction you are observing?
Think what to say. The success of your message is determined by how it is spoken.
ACT to monitor and observe safe and at-risk/unsafe behavior as well as unsafe
conditions. Anticipate and recognize change and immediately interrupt the task to
evaluate the change to either correct the condition/behavior or revise the plan. If a
person is working in an at-risk/unsafe manner, immediately interrupt the task and
correct the behavior. Failing to take action means that you condone the unsafe
condition or at-risk/unsafe behavior.
identify safe conditions and safe behavior and/or interrupt the operation to act on an
unsafe condition or at-risk/unsafe behavior.
For people to provide effective feedback to one another requires they actively care
about each other’s safety. Effective feedback requires that people recognize and re-
enforce safe behavior at every opportunity and interrupt/correct at-risk/unsafe
behavior immediately.
All personnel must continually monitor their THINK plans and work conditions using
the START Process.
The quality of START observations is enhanced by performing them daily using the
START Card.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process
Supervisors must ensure that they and their personnel perform START observations
and record them on START Cards.
START monitoring is an essential part of the execution of any THINK Plan. It must
be continuously performed. START monitoring is performed by an individual on their
Individual THINK Plan, or performed by a group of individuals on the group’s THINK
plan. START monitoring the execution of a plan is another method of tracking.
must be performed to compare what is actually seen, heard and experienced versus
what is planned to be seen, heard or experienced.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process
5.2 SUPERVISORS:
• Actively participate in START observations and monitoring.
• Review trends to identify potential proactive efforts.
• Ensure their personnel are trained to perform START observations and
monitoring.
• Review START Cards submitted by their personnel daily.
• Conduct periodic dedicated START observation tours.
• Participate with their people to ensure they are performing START
Observations correctly.
• Make clear their expectations regarding safe behavior and safe conditions.
• Not to tolerate repetitive at-risk/unsafe behaviors by people and always take
the appropriate action to correct.
• Actively participate in employee START training utilizing Module 7 of the
“Transocean Safety Leadership Training” DVD as a tool to ensure effective
understanding of the process.
5.3 OIM:
• Ensure an effective system is in place for tracking, communicating and
trending START observations.
• Review observation trends and ensure appropriate proactive measures are
implemented if necessary.
• Lead interdepartmental START observations.
• Lead clients, subcontractors and client subcontractors to actively participate
in START observations and monitoring.
• Ensure systems are in place to review and communicate observations by
personnel, supervisors and onboard management.
• Hold supervisors accountable for their participation, and that of their people,
in START observations and monitoring.
• Actively recognize personnel’s proactive efforts in START observations and
monitoring (quality cards, participation, consistency of observations).
• Make clear their expectations regarding safe behavior and safe conditions.
• Ensure that at risk/unsafe behavior by people is not tolerated and always take
the appropriate action to correct.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process
6 DOCUMENTATION
The form indicated below is included in the manual and is not to be modified from its
original format. The form has been developed by Corporate HSE Services and is a
requirement of this policy. The form must be reproduced and made available to all
installations/facilities by their Division/Business Unit offices. Forward any suggested
improvements to the START Card using the HSE Feedback form.
• START Card (Figure A)
(Must be retained until the information is entered into the tracking system.)
The START Card can be used to facilitate individual and verbal THINK Plan
development at the worksite. The card can be used as a checklist for identifying
potential hazards during the job planning stages.
The START Card provides a convenient method to capture the initial details of a
Near Hit by using the categories on the card that are relevant to the event. These
details are transferred to the Incident Report for formal reporting.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
START Process
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel
1 POLICY
Effective means for the safe transport of personnel to and from Company
installations or facilities must be in place.
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to reduce the risk of injury to any person and prevent
other incidents while traveling.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation.
4 PROCEDURE
All personnel should be given a travel safety briefing within 24 hours before traveling
to any installation.
All personnel must be given a travel safety briefing within 24 hours prior to departing
from any installation, covering all safety requirements specific to the mode of
transportation.
During helicopter flights over water, life jackets must be worn unless specific
circumstances dictate otherwise (for example, injury or local legislation).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel
During all helicopter flights, seat belts and hearing protection must be worn and
smoking instructions adhered to. Passengers and helideck crew must wear hearing
protection when approaching or departing helicopters if helicopter engines are
running.
Passengers must exit the helicopter before refueling unless otherwise authorized by
the pilot.
Lightweight or loose articles must be held firmly to prevent them from being sucked
into engine intakes or rotor blades.
When transporting long items in the area of a helicopter, they must be carried
horizontally to prevent contact with rotor blades.
The HLO must ensure that a fireman dressed in full protective gear is positioned at a
safe distance from the helideck but close enough to man firefighting equipment and
perform entry rescue if necessary. The fireman must maintain a safe distance until
the helicopter makes its landing.
The HLO must ensure the fireman has no other duties while so assigned
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel
In all cases, the helicopter company or client must inform the installation of the
helicopter’s arrival with sufficient notice to allow mobilization and readiness of the
standby boat and helideck crew.
The HLO must ensure the helideck is ready for helicopter operations prior to arrival,
including the following minimum aspects:
• Helideck equipment is verified as operational.
• Helideck is cleared of all loose material.
• Helideck crew wears suitable and secure PPE.
Personnel must only disembark or approach the helicopter under the direction of the
HLO after clearance from the pilot.
Only designated helideck crewmembers are permitted to load and unload baggage
to and from the helicopter.
The installation radio operator and pilot must establish and maintain communication
with the helicopter throughout the operation.
During refueling, the helicopter must be grounded to the installation and fire-fighting
equipment on the helideck manned.
Life jackets must be available for all Company personnel traveling by boat.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel
Transfer of personnel between installations and boats must be done only with an
approved personnel transfer device (for example, personnel basket or Frog). The
OIM or designee must approve transfers only after considering natural light
conditions, the wind, sea condition, motion of the installation relative to the boat,
available landing area on the boat deck, experience of the crane operator and
crewmembers being transferred.
The number of personnel on the basket at any time must not exceed the
manufacturer’s specified maximum.
Personnel must wear life jackets or other personal flotation devices during transfer.
Landing areas at both ends of the transfer must be adequately sized and illuminated.
Any person sick, suffering vertigo or injured must not be allowed to ride the basket,
unless placed inside and escorted by an experienced crewmember.
No cargo except personal luggage may be transferred with the personnel basket.
Luggage must be placed in the middle of the basket and cannot be held by
personnel during transfer.
The basket must be kept over water as much as possible during the transfer.
One transfer basket must be available for use at all times. The basket must be
regularly inspected, certified and recorded in the lifting gear register, in addition to
being visually inspected immediately prior to each use.
The standby boat, if available, must be in close proximity to the installation until the
transfer operation is complete.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel
Company vehicles must only be driven by approved persons holding a valid driving
license for the class of vehicle recognized by the local authority, and operated
according to local traffic laws.
Driving Company vehicles while impaired by any means is prohibited. This includes
driving a personal vehicle while on Company business, as well as a short-term lease
(less than one month) or Company vehicle. For impairment see Section 4
Subsection 5.8. For drugs and alcohol see Section 4 Subsection 1.2.
The driver and all occupants in Company vehicles must wear seat belts.
Each Division must make available defensive driver training appropriate for the local
conditions. This should be supported with a “hands-on” driving assessment for all
new drivers. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
All personnel driving Company vehicles must receive defensive driver training
appropriate for the local conditions.
The use of cellular phones while driving any vehicle on Company business is
prohibited unless the phone is used with a “hands free” device, providing this does
not violate local law. Persons should pull over and park the vehicle safely before
holding telephone conversations.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Travel
Company personnel must use the THINK planning process prior to driving in
Company vehicles.
All loads must be secure and not exceed the manufacturer’s design/specification for
the vehicle.
The combination of passengers and load or cargo must be safe even if they do not
exceed the manufacturer’s design/specifications for the vehicle.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 HLO:
• Be certified as HLO by Company approved instructor prior to performing as
HLO.
• Direct all activities on the helicopter deck, including loading or unloading of
passengers and baggage.
• Ensure a fireman dressed in full protective gear is positioned safely near the
helideck to man firefighting equipment or perform entry rescue if necessary.
• Ensure fireman has no other duties while assigned to the helideck duties.
• Ensure the helideck is ready for helicopter operations prior to arrival.
5.3 OIM:
• Ensure Helicopter Safety DVD-ROM is watched at intervals determined by
the Business Unit Vice President.
• Designate a Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO) to coordinate the movement of
personnel arriving or departing the installation.
• Approve boat transfers of personnel only after considering the relevant safety
factors described in the procedure.
• Ensure all personnel are given a travel safety briefing within 24 hours prior to
departing from any installation, covering all safety requirements specific to the
mode of transportation.
• Authorize personnel to give instruction in the proper use of the basket.
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 7
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to enforce safe work practices to prevent injuries or
damage to the environment.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency at any
Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
Understanding risk and acknowledging that not everyone perceives risk at the same
level creates the need for effective communication at all times. All Company
personnel are responsible for their own safety and behavior. They are also obligated
to interrupt any unsafe operation and take necessary steps to correct any unsafe
behavior or conditions.
The procedure below does not capture all basic safe work practices but is meant to
give examples to encourage personnel to THINK about basic safe work practices
when planning or carrying out a task. Typically, many injuries occur when basic safe
practices are not followed, causing slips, trips, falls and crush points. Proactively
using the THINK planning and START monitoring processes and incorporating basic
safe practices will prevent such injuries from occurring.
4.1 HOUSEKEEPING
All Company installations and facilities must be maintained with the highest regard
for good housekeeping practices in the areas of cleanliness and appearance.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 1 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
All work areas on the installation or at the facility must be maintained in a way that
provides a safe and organized working environment.
Floors, steps, stairs and walkways must be kept clean and free from slippery
substances, tripping hazards or other obstructions to the best extent possible.
All stairs outside the accommodations area must be fitted with a non-slip surface
such as SCOTGRIP SSN Premier or equivalent. This includes all indoor machinery
spaces.
Non-slip surfaces must be maintained in good condition and free of oil and mud to
the best extent possible.
Adequate measures to prevent spills and leaks from becoming hazards must be put
in place (for example, drip trays, splash guards, sight glass isolations, drain plugs,
and so forth).
Slips, protectors, tools, and so on should be promptly and properly stored and not
allowed to accumulate around the work area.
Soiled cleaning materials, scrap and waste must be placed in designated containers
for proper disposal.
4.2 LIGHTING
Lighting systems shall provide a sufficient level of illumination in all work areas. All
light lenses must be kept clean and maintained.
All escape routes, embarkation areas and any emergency control panels shall have
the ability to be supplied by an emergency power source in the event of loss of
normal power.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 2 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
Escape routes and access to safety equipment must be clearly identified and must
not be restricted in any way, unless alternative plans are in place.
All deck cargo must be stored in a manner to prevent movement caused by adverse
weather conditions and/or vessel motion.
All loose items of deck cargo must be located in areas where deck loading
limitations are not exceeded.
“Lever” or “Breakover” style chain binders must not be used by Company personnel
or used to secure Company owned equipment. If these type binders are used to
secure subcontractor equipment they must be fitted or removed by a representative
of the company that is responsible for the equipment. If it is not possible for a
subcontractor representative to fit/remove the binder, a supervisor such as a Crane
Operator or Deck Foreman must perform the task.
If a binding device is needed, ratchet style load binders, turnbuckles, or ratchet style
tie down straps must be used by Company personnel to secure Company owned
equipment.
The manufacturer's stated safe working limit for any piece of equipment or system
must not be exceeded. Safeguards or procedures must be present to prevent
exceeding these limits. The equipment must be maintained in such a manner to
allow operation up to the safe working limit. When exceptional circumstances
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 3 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
When continuous operation of equipment approaching the stated safe working limit
is required, consideration must be given to additional safety measures to be taken in
case of equipment failure. This could include guards, barriers or restrictions to
personnel being put in place, or simply ensuring that all personnel are aware of the
increased hazard of equipment approaching its operational limit.
The derrick racking board and the rotary table must be visible to the driller either by
direct line of sight or by remote camera.
The derrick racking board must be equipped with mechanical means to assist in
moving tubulars.
Tubulars must be secured at the derrick racking board level immediately after being
racked.
Dumbbell type safety handles must be fitted on all manual tongs including extension
jaws for casing and BHAs, as well as spares held onboard.
Industry recognized pinch points will be painted yellow and black, safe handholds
will be painted green.
Web handles should be used to maneuver power tongs on and off tubulars.
Personnel must stay clear of tong lines and chains while tension is being applied for
makeup or break out of tubulars.
BHA components must not be allowed to fall over after being removed from the drill
string.
Formation accumulation and safety clamps must be removed from tool joints and/or
BHA components before being hoisted into the mast/derrick.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 4 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
Hands or feet must not be placed below the core barrel opening while recovering
cores.
During wireline operations, the drill floor, wireline unit and any areas between the
two where the wireline is in tension must be designated as restricted areas.
Prior to start of wireline operations, a THINK plan meeting must be held with
relevant installation and subcontractor personnel.
Public address announcements must be made at the start, as necessary during and
at the completion of wireline operations.
Fluid levels in the well bore must be monitored throughout the wireline operation.
Derricks, masts, crane booms and any area where there is a potential of dropped
objects must be inspected at regular intervals to ensure that objects are adequately
secured with safety lines or that a secondary means of securing is in place to
prevent any objects from falling. Surplus or redundant equipment must be removed.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 5 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
The Dropped Objects Inventory Register must include but is not limited to the
following areas and related equipment:
• Derrick and Substructure
− Crown and water table
− Monkey board
− Traveling equipment
− Drill floor and mezzanine deck
− Lower substructure and BOP area
• BOP and Tubular Handling Equipment
− Pipe racking system (PRS)
− Pipe handling system
− Top drive
− Pick Up/Lay down machines
− BOP Crane
− Drill floor hoists
− Iron roughneck
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 6 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
Medium and high priority deficiencies from regular DROPS maintenance tasks must
be entered into FOCUS.
All tools, equipment and other loose items taken into the derrick must be entered
into the Derrick Log Book (See Section 4 Subsection 5.5)
4.10 KNIVES
The use of knives is prohibited except for food preparation and dining. Alternative
cutting tools must be used.
Crewmembers must be made aware of safe working practices associated with hand
tools, including but not limited to:
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 7 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
• The proper tool for the job and its correct use
• Inspection of tools prior to use to verify fit for purpose.
• Proper securing of tools when working at heights.
• Tracking of tools taken up the mast/derrick.
• Requirement to not modify the design of a tool.
• Procedures for cleaning and storing tools on completion of the task.
Hand tools must not be used beyond the manufacturer's operating limits or in ways
not recommended/approved by the manufacturer, specifically (as a minimum):
• Torque, air pressure and rated rpm
• Explosion protection for use in designated hazardous areas
• Shock proofing for use in wet conditions
• Size of tools to be used with equipment (drills, discs, and so forth)
The OIM must ensure that necessary tools are provided onboard and that training is
given to employees in their proper use. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
No personal tools may be used to perform work on any installation or at any facility.
Hand tools that are in an unsafe or questionable condition must be taken out of
service and repaired or replaced. To ensure tool integrity is not compromised,
repairs to hand tools may only be effected by the manufacturer or by someone with
the knowledge, skills and ability to safely complete the repair.
Only approved explosion protected extension cords may be used in areas defined as
hazardous areas and where there may be potential gaseous conditions.
Before using portable ladders or steps, Company personnel must be trained in their
correct use and the procedures to be followed in order to identify and control the
hazards associated with their use. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 8 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
Portable ladders and steps may be used for work at a height only under
circumstances in which the use of safer access equipment is not justified in view of
the short duration of use and low level of risk.
Portable ladders and steps must be positioned to ensure their stability during use. It
is essential that they rest on a stable, strong, immobile and horizontal footing.
Portable ladders must be secured to prevent slipping before they are used. Ladders
with several sections must be correctly used and secured to ensure that the sections
are prevented from moving relative to each other.
Portable ladders and steps should be stored undercover with adequate ventilation.
They should be kept away from excessive heat or dampness and not be left
exposed to the weather.
All portable ladders and steps must be inspected before use. Portable ladders and
steps found to be unsafe must be removed from service.
Before passing through any powered (local or remote controlled) watertight door or
hatch opening, the door or hatch must be in the full open position and not in motion.
Persons having access to remote control switches for powered doors or hatches
must be assured the area is clear of personnel before activating remote control
switches.
All powered (local- or remote controlled) watertight doors and hatches must have an
audible and visual warning system at both sides of the door or hatch that warns
personnel of the hazard of the door or hatch opening or closing.
All powered (local controlled) watertight doors must have signs posted adjacent to
and on both sides of the door indicating: "Warning - Open Door Fully Before Passing
Through."
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 9 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
All powered (remote controlled) watertight doors must have signs posted adjacent to
and on both sides of the door indicating: "Warning - Open Door Fully Before Passing
Through. This Door May Close Automatically."
All remote controlled machinery with exposed moving parts (such as anchor
winches, jacking gears, wireline units, hose reels, and so forth), must be clearly
marked with warning signs stating "Warning - this machinery may be remotely
operated at any time" or a similar statement.
All installations must be equipped with fixed hands-free communication systems, (for
example, talkback, clearcall, and so on) between the driller’s stations and the derrick
racking board, as well as between the driller’s stations and the BOP working area.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 10 11
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
General Safe Work Practices
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.2 OIM:
• Ensure that necessary tools and equipment associated with this policy and
procedure are provided onboard and that training is given to employees in
their proper use.
• Approve the connection of non-explosion protected hand tools to explosion
protected cords in a hazardous area and ensure a valid Permit to Work is in
effect.
• Ensure the installation is maintained with the highest regard for good
housekeeping and deck management.
• Ensure a system for designating areas of responsibility is put in place.
6 DOCUMENTATION
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
3 SCOPE
This policy covers all personnel that work at Company installations and facilities.
4 PROCEDURE
Worm drive securing devices (jubilee clips, radiator hose clamps, and so on) must
not be used on pressurized connections.
4.1 TRAINING
Training for compressed gases may be found in the Safety OJT Module.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
Only personnel authorized by the OIM or designee may perform isolations. These
personnel must be competent in their knowledge and understanding of hazards, the
equipment to be worked on, and the procedures and skills necessary to effect and
remove the following categories of isolations:
• Electrical
• Mechanical
• Hydraulic
• Pneumatic
• Thermal
• Kinetic
• Chemical
• Stored
Aspects concerning the control of the hazards associated with electricity are detailed
within the Electrical Safety policy. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.9)
Grinding/abrasive wheels and their working RPM must match that of the grinder.
Lathes, drilling machines, pedestal drills and band saws must be fitted with an
instantaneous shut down device (for example, DC injection braking). If
instantaneous shutdown devices cannot be fitted, guards must be installed that
enclose all moving parts and prevent the machine from operating when they are
removed.
All shop appliances not fitted with instantaneous shutdown devices must be fitted
with a “deadman” switch.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
Power hand tools must not have the ability to be locked in the “On” position.
The hazards of other forms of mechanical energy (including springs, levers, and
equipment falling due to failed hydraulic systems) must be controlled.
Pressure is defined as any substance (air, hydraulic, water, well bore fluids, and so
forth) under pressure, for test purposes or for normal use, that can cause severe
injury to personnel or damage to property if a sudden rupture or burst occurs.
Pressure relief lines must be secured against movement when pressure is released.
For maintenance isolations, there must be a positive means to confirm all pressure
is relieved and system is made safe by proper lockouts of control valves. This may
mean locking valves open or closed.
All personnel on board must be made aware of pressure testing and the area
involved must be appropriately marked and/or barricaded.
A means must be provided to ensure that the intended maximum pressure is not
exceeded. To avoid exceeding the intended maximum pressure, use test pressure
only during testing operations. Safe working pressure must be adhered to for normal
use.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
Components under pressure must not be subjected to any form of shock loading,
used as a lifting gear securing point, hammered on or used as support for other
equipment.
All personnel involved in the operation must be made aware of the possibility of
trapped pressure in any pressurized system. A means of safely bleeding off
pressure must be an integral part of the system. Special precautions should be
taken when troubleshooting any problem with pressurized systems.
All fixed-pressure vessels must have the maximum safe working pressure clearly
indicated and a means of indicating current pressure. Pressure relief mechanisms
must be installed to prevent exceeding the safe working pressure, and must be
tested as per the Company Standard PM Task for EMPAC asset 00959 - Relief
Valves.
A system must be in place to ensure that the downstream side of pressure relief
mechanisms remains clear of obstructions.
Each accumulator bank will be fitted with an isolation valve and a vent valve, as well
as a pressure gauge that is fitted with an isolation valve and a vent valve. There
must be provision provided to lock these valves in the open or closed position.
Portable hoses and fittings must be suitable for the intended use (pressure, volume,
contents, and so forth), inspected prior to use, properly installed and secured (for
example: whipchecks, “R” clips, etc.) in case of connection failure.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
All gas cylinders must be checked for general condition, leaks and hydrostatic test
date upon arrival at the Installation or facility. Cylinders must be marked with the
date these checks were performed and indicate that they meet the preceding
criteria.
Nitrogen cylinder contents must be checked with a gas detector (oxygen analyzer) to
confirm whether the contents are inert or flammable. However, in developed areas
where an established infrastructure provides reliable and consistent quality control
supported by regulatory legislation, this check may be performed prior to delivery to
the installation/facility. The cylinder must be accompanied with documentation to
confirm the contents. The gas/cylinder provider should have a system in place to
manage and track the inspection and filling of the gas cylinders.
Cylinders must be stored in an upright position at all times. Caps must be removed
only when the cylinders are in use. If cylinders are designed for caps, they must be
secured on both full and empty cylinders while they are being moved or transported.
Cylinder trolleys should be used to transport cylinders from one place to another.
Portable transfer racks and cylinder trolleys subject to being hoisted must be
included in the lifting gear register.
Cylinders should not be subjected to temperatures above 54°C (129°F) and should
be stored in a shaded area. Cylinders must also be protected from the radiant heat
of flares.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
Empty cylinders should be separated from full ones and must be marked
accordingly.
Oxygen and acetylene cylinders must not be stored alongside one another. They
must be separated by a distance of at least six meters or with a non-flammable
barrier.
Cylinders must not be used as rollers or support even if they are believed to be
empty.
Valves on all compressed gas cylinders must be closed when not in use.
An efficient backpressure valve (in-line check valve) and a flash/flame arrestor must
be provided near the cylinder in the acetylene and oxygen supply lines.
The pressure of oxygen should always be high enough to prevent acetylene flowing
back into the oxygen line.
Acetylene pressure should not exceed 1-bar (14.7psi) due to risk of explosion.
Manifold hose connections, including inlet and outlet connections, should be such
that the hose cannot be interchanged between fuel gases and oxygen manifolds and
headers.
No liquid filled gauges may be used on any compressed gas bottles unless it is filled
with Halocarbon liquid.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
Only those hoses specifically designed for welding and cutting operations should be
used to connect an oxygen/acetylene cutting torch to gas outlets.
Accumulators and pulsation dampeners must be pre-charged with only inert gases,
such as nitrogen.
Oxygen must not be used in place of compressed air for tools, air starters, cleaning
purposes or other uses.
Compressed air must not be used as a means of removing dust, dirt, and so forth,
from a person’s body or clothing.
Air used for cleaning or drying purposes must only be done using adequate tools,
and the pressure must be limited to 30psi.
Compressed air must not be used for blowing a drift through tubulars.
Compressed air must not be used for clearing a blocked line or pipe, except during
the routine operation of the bulk system.
The main rig air system or any rig air compressor must not be connected to the flare
boom. Connection to the flare boom via portable air compressor(s) stored on an
open deck is allowed.
Isolation valves cannot be installed in relief lines either before or after the pressure
relief mechanism.
Other forms of potential energy must be considered during the hazard identification
step of the THINK Planning Process, including:
• Thermal Energy, such as heat or cold radiating from hot or cold surfaces;
heat generated by friction or chemical reaction, steam lines, steam lances,
and so forth; or cold generated by flowing gas, and so forth.
• Kinetic energy, such as unsecured hanging items swinging due to vessel
motion, movement due to sudden impact from another item, dropped objects,
and so forth.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
• Chemical energy, which can be the result of a chemical reaction between two
or more substances. Review the manufacturer's instructions and Material
Safety Data Sheets before mixing chemical substances (for example, two-part
paints, two-part resins, use of acid or alkaline batteries, and so forth).
• Nuclear energy (which results in a radioactive hazard) and explosives are
covered in the Hazardous Material Policy. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.7)
• Stored energy (such as compressed springs and electrical capacitance)
which may not be as obvious or as easily isolated.
A. RESPONSIBLE PERSON
The person who authorizes isolations within an area of operation or for a particular
system. The OIM must authorize Responsible Persons for defined areas of
operation and systems.
B. COMPETENT PERSON
The person who is in charge of carrying out the work on the isolated equipment and
is the person who requests permission for the isolation from the Responsible
Person.
D. OIM
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
The overall objective is to always use the highest level of isolation that is reasonably
practicable.
• The adequacy of the isolation must reflect any reasonably foreseeable
hazards and the consequences should those hazards be realized.
• Isolations must be in place throughout the duration of the operation.
• Isolations must be “tried” to prove effectiveness.
• Isolated equipment and remote operating stations must be correctly and
clearly identified with energy isolation tags.
• Isolations must be recorded in the documentation system.
A standard isolation is one that is in place for equipment or systems for work
performed during a period less than 24 hours (see paragraph 4.3.5 for Long Term
Isolation).
The following is the standard process for a person in charge of carrying out the work
to request an electrical, mechanical, pneumatic, thermal and/or hydraulic isolation:
• Contact the relevant departmental responsible person.
• The responsible person authorizes the isolation and ensures the person in
charge of carrying out the work fully understands all relevant isolations
required.
• The person in charge of carrying out the work contacts the competent person
who then performs the isolation.
• The competent person must ensure that all stored energy is discharged prior
to performing the isolation.
• The competent person isolates and tags the equipment or system with the
required warning tags. Locks, hasps or other special arrangements to
positively isolate the energy source may be required.
• The competent person and person in charge of carrying out the work must
physically conduct a test to ensure that the isolation is effective before work
on the equipment or system begins. This can be achieved by either
attempting to operate (if equipment) or (if a system) by other physical means
(mechanical, electrical, bleed off of pressure, etc.) to confirm positive
isolation.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
The competent person and person in charge of carrying out the work (who may be
the same person) must enter the isolation details on the isolation certificate. One
copy of the isolation certificate is retained at the isolation co-ordination point and the
person in charge of carrying out the work retains a copy.
There must be a system in place for each person performing work on an isolated
piece of equipment to maintain control (individually lock or secure) of the mechanism
maintaining the isolation.
The following is the standard de-isolation process for the person in charge of
carrying out the work to request an electrical, mechanical, pneumatic, thermal and/or
hydraulic de-isolation:
• When a job is complete, the person in charge of carrying out the work must
complete the relevant section of the isolation certificate. When de-isolating
from a long-term isolation, the isolation must also be closed out in the long-
term isolation logbook and removed from the notification board.
• The person in charge of carrying out the work requests the responsible
person to confirm that the equipment is safe to be de-isolated.
• The competent person ensures that it is safe to restore energy, removes all
isolation tags (locks, etc., if used) and signs off on the isolation certificate.
• The responsible person or designee can now test the equipment. They must
be satisfied that the equipment is operating correctly and that the relevant
people have been informed before the equipment is returned to service.
An isolation is considered long-term if it has been active for more than 24 hours and
the equipment is no longer actually being worked on (for example, awaiting spare
parts) but is not ready for de-isolation.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
When a change of status from standard to long-term isolation is required, the person
in charge of carrying out the work notifies the responsible person and all parties
involved in the standard isolation.
During any long-term isolation, the following additional points must be addressed:
• The OIM must be informed by responsible person.
• The method of securing the long-term isolation (for example, locking of
electrical isolators, locking of valve handles, removal of valve handles, use of
blind flanges, and so forth) must be confirmed.
• All copies of the isolation certificate must be marked “LONG-TERM
ISOLATION.”
• One copy of the isolation certificate must be retained at the isolation
coordination point.
• Long-term isolations must have a copy of the isolation certificate at the
isolation points and may also have a copy on the equipment itself.
• A long-term isolation logbook or notification board must be maintained at an
appropriate central location.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
• Visit the work site and ensure THINK Plans and Isolations are appropriate.
• Test the equipment and must be satisfied that the equipment is operating
correctly and that the relevant people have been informed before the
equipment is returned to service.
• Notify the OIM when any standard isolation becomes long-term.
5.4 OIM:
• Ensure a system is in place to meet the requirements outlined in this
procedure.
• Ensure all Company personnel who perform maintenance or repairs have
been trained in the requirements of energy isolation (rendering
equipment/system safe from an energy source or sources) as per Company
training.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
6 DOCUMENTATION
The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples are
not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of the
examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Cylinder Status Tag (Figure A)
(Must remain on cylinders from the time they arrive to the time they depart the
installation or facility.)
• Energy Isolation Certificate (Figure B)
(Must be retained in the installation or facility files for a period of one year.)
An isolation logbook may be used at the discretion of the Business Unit Vice
President. The purpose of the logbook is to provide an efficient method for tracking
and auditing isolation certificates.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.4
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Energy Sources and Isolation
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
1 POLICY
All installations and facilities must adequately protect personnel from the risk
of falling from heights.
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to ensure that the risk of falling is assessed and
personnel are protected from falling and the injuries associated with falling.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
4.1 TRAINING
All employees must be trained to recognize the hazards of falling and the
procedures to be followed in order to minimize any associated risk. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3) The training must include a practical demonstration using
equipment utilized on the installation. The training must be given in an organized
manner and must be fully documented.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
All stairways and permanently elevated walking and working areas must be
equipped with handrails.
All handrails, barriers, stairways, gratings, elevated walkways and elevated working
areas must be maintained. A procedure for verifying the integrity of these structures
must be included in the planned maintenance system.
Units or Divisions must define and approve specific fall protection equipment to meet
the minimum standards outlined in this procedure and comply with local legislation.
(See HQS-OPS-EST-708-02 Equipment standard for Fall Protection Devices)
Fall protection systems and equipment must be inspected before each use and
included in the planned maintenance system.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
Fall protection equipment inspection criteria and regime must meet the
manufacturer’s recommendations for each.
The rescue of personnel working at elevated levels must be discussed and planned
for during the THINK planning process for the relevant task. As a minimum, the
following must be considered during discussion and planning:
• Equipment required to perform rescue operations.
• Length of time required to perform rescue operations.
• Forces exerted on personnel from being suspended for that period of time.
• Availability of alternative methods to perform rescue operations.
Equipment designed for rescue from heights must be stored, maintained and
inspected as per the manufacturer recommendations and included in the
installation’s planned maintenance system.
All fall protection PPE must be properly stowed in dedicated boxes or lockers when
not in use.
Only Company approved ladder-climbing systems, fall arrest devices and full body
harnesses may be used for ladder climbing.
Back scratchers or ladder cages are not considered suitable or sufficient fall
protection equipment.
All derrick ladders must be fitted with a dedicated fixed-ladder climbing system.
All ladders designated “For Emergency Escape Only” must be clearly identified (for
example, painted red) in a manner to avoid confusion with other ladders and
maintained so it is accessible and kept clear of obstruction.
Any ladder used as a platform to perform work must be fitted with fall protection
suitable for the work performed.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
All fixed vertical ladders over 10 feet (3.05 meters), except those used solely for
emergency escape, require one of the following during ascent or descent:
1) A dedicated fixed ladder climbing system OR
2) The use of a permanent or temporary fall arrest device OR
3) Fall prevention providing 100% tie off at all times.
All fixed vertical ladders over 10 feet (3.05 meters), except those used solely for
emergency escape, must be assessed to determine a suitable means of fall
protection. This assessment must include as a minimum:
• Necessity of ladder
• Feasibility of replacement with stairway
• Location of ladder
• Frequency and duration of use (rarely/often used)
• Existing, normal condition of ladder (slippery, damaged, clean, dry, and so
forth)
• A procedure for installation of a temporary or permanent fall arrest device
prior to use or procedure for use of fall prevention that provides 100% tie off
at all times (if determined a fixed ladder system is not practical)
Ladders not exceeding the height of 10 feet (3.05 meters) do not require the use of
fall protection provided a formal risk assessment determines the appropriate answer
is “no” to each of the following questions:
• Is there a potential for falling a distance greater than 10 feet? (for example:
into an open hole, overboard, or to a lower level landing, and so on)
• Is the ladder used daily AND there is a danger of landing on sharp objects or
moving machinery parts?
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
NOTE: A “yes” answer to any of the above questions will require the use of fall
protection and the assessment outlined in paragraph 4.5.1 (above) for ladders
over 10 feet must be used.
When a formal risk assessment concludes that the fitting of a fall arrest system or
device would likely encumber or restrict the user or increase the potential of the fall
hazard, such a system or device does not need to be installed if appropriate
alternative control measures are put in place.
All fall arrest systems must limit the arrest force to 1,800 lbs. (818 kg), use a
Company approved full body harness, be connected to an acceptable anchor point
and have compatible connectors throughout.
All materials and equipment used in fall arrest systems must be purpose bought for
the use intended. Any equipment having potential to be confused with lifting gear
must be identifiable as fall protection only.
An acceptable anchor point for a personal fall arrest system is a secure point of
attachment (for example, a beam, girder, column, floor, or other fixed structural
member capable of withstanding a minimum force of 5,000 lbs. (2273 kg) for each
person attached to that anchor point). The anchor point must be located above
personnel to minimize free-fall distance and swing-fall potential, which must not
exceed the manufacturer's recommendations, or 30 degrees from vertical
(whichever is less).
Compatible connectors (for example, D-rings, O-rings and eye bolts) are sized to
reduce the possibility of rollout or side loading on the safety gate of the connecting
snaphook or carabiner connector.
Snaphooks must not be connected to snaphooks and carabiner connectors must not
be connected to carabiner connectors.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
Fall arrest systems, with the exception of ladder climbing systems and SRL’s, must
include a shock-absorbing device and must be attached to the rear D-ring (dorsal
attachment) of the full-body harness.
Fall arrest systems, in conjunction with a personal flotation device, must be utilized
when there is a possibility of falling into the water.
Any component of a fall arrest system that is used to arrest a fall must be returned to
a manufacturer authorized service center for re-certification.
Self retracting lifelines (inertia reels) must be retracted when not in use to prevent
alteration of the spring memory or corrosion of the cable.
Additional shock absorbing devices must not be used in conjunction with inertia
reels.
Cargo type slings may be used to secure the SRL to the anchor point. Only sling
type adaptors manufactured for this purpose and with compatible connectors may be
utilized with fall protection equipment. (See HQS-OPS-EST-708-02 Equipment
Standard for Fall Protection Devices)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
Access to the derrick is only with the driller's permission. A Derrick Log Book must
be used to record personnel movement, tools taken into the derrick and any unsafe
observations.
The derrickman's safety harness must be stowed at the entrance of the monkey
board to allow the derrickman to put it on prior to walking onto the work platform and
to remove it after leaving the platform.
The derrickman must wear a fall arrest system in addition to a fall restraint system.
The anchor point for the fall arrest system must be capable of withstanding a
minimum force of 5,000 lbs. (2273 kg), and must be located above the monkey
board to minimize free-fall distance and swing-fall potential.
The traveling block must remain near the rig floor while derrickmen are changing out
until the new derrickman confirms that he has donned and secured the safety
harness.
This device must operate if the hoisting mechanism fails or if the wire breaks,
and must prevent the traveling carriage assembly from free falling. This anti-
fall device consists of a separate safety wire rope connected to the derrick,
which passes through a slack rope safety lock connected to the traveling
carriage assembly, which automatically operates in the event mentioned
above. The safety lock is actuated by loss of tension in the main winch cable,
which initiates an immediate stop of downward travel by the carriage. The
safety rope runs between side rails for protection.
• Tertiary locking device: Parking brake
A mechanically operated safety lock latch mechanism must be fitted to the
carriage assembly framework with pawls which engage with the latch rails on
the stabbing board when the carriage is stationary. Alternately, where
restraints preclude using a mechanical lock latch system, a pneumatic fail
safe lock can be used, operating on the same safety cable as the slack rope
safety lock.
• Extension platform position warning device
A safety indicator must be provided to warn the driller that the board is in the
path of the traveling block assembly (the casing stabbing board is in the
extended position/extension platform out). An example of a warning device is
a limit switch that activates a red light in the driller’s house whenever the
platform is extended.
• Safety harness and fall arrestor at the casing stabbing board/basket.
A safety harness connected to a fall arrestor must be available at the casing
stabbing board. The fall arrestor must be secured to the derrick/mast. It is
forbidden to install the harness to the traveling part of the platform. The fall
arrestor must be of an inertia reel type to accommodate the traveling up or
down of the casing operator and platform.
The fall arrest system for personnel working from the stabbing board/basket must
include:
• An anchor point located on the derrick structure (not on the stabbing
board/basket or stabbing board structure).
• A self retracting lifeline to allow vertical movement of the stabbing
board/basket.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
4.13 SCAFFOLDING
All scaffold training must be approved by the Division Manager. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3)
The OIM must designate a competent person to perform scaffold inspections aboard
the installation.
Note: The inspection criteria applies to all scaffold which has been erected on
the installation.
All scaffolding erected aboard the installation must have the following specifications
as a minimum:
• Handrails
• Ladders (to enable easy entrance and exit)
• Toe boards (to eliminate loose items or tools from falling)
• Clean walkways that are clear of loose objects and debris
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.3 OIM:
• Only permit Company personnel who have completed the Division approved
training to erect scaffolding.
• Designate a Competent Person to inspect the type of scaffold that is erected
on the installation.
• Ensure all employees are trained to recognize the hazards of falling and the
procedures to be followed in order to minimize any associated risk.
• Ensure there is one person on the installation at all times, trained as a
Competent Person by a Company approved instructor in the following:
1. Fall protection
2. Confined space rescue
3. Rescue from heights
• Ensure an integrity verification procedure for handrails, barriers, stairways,
gratings, elevated walkways and elevated working areas is included in the
installation’s planned maintenance system.
• Ensure rescue from heights equipment is included in the installation’s planned
maintenance system.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
6 DOCUMENTATION
The form indicated below is included in the manual as an example only and is
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of this form is not mandatory. However, if the example is not
used exactly as it is included, the form used must include the key elements of the
example and must be approved by the Unit Vice President.
• Derrick Log Book (Figure A)
(Must be retained in installation or facility files for a period of one year after
the last entry date.)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.5
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Fall Protection
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 12
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
1 POLICY
All lifting equipment in service must have current certification or have been
successfully load tested within the last year.
All lifting equipment must be suitable for the lift and visually inspected for
condition prior to each use.
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to prevent injury or incidents during mechanical lifting
operations.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
Lifting equipment includes lifting gear and lifting appliances as described below.
Lifting Gear - Any device that is used or designed to be used directly or indirectly to
connect a load to a lifting appliance and does not form part of the load. Examples of
lifting gear are: slings, wire rope, hook, plate clamp, scissor clamp, shackle, eyebolt,
lifting beam, bushing puller, lifting caps and so on.
Lifting Appliances - Any mechanical device capable of raising or lowering a load (for
example, crane, chain block, pull lift, winch, drawworks, and so on).
Cargo Carrying Unit – any equipment used to contain or transfer a load. Examples
are: containers, baskets, gas bottle racks, personnel transfer baskets, waste skips,
and so on.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Any person using lifting equipment must be trained in the rigging practices and load
handling methods used for that equipment. They must also have working knowledge
of its capabilities and any defects likely to arise in service. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3)
Equipment found to have a defect affecting the safe operation must be removed
from service and repaired, load tested and authorized for use or destroyed.
A register of all lifting equipment must be maintained at each installation and facility.
This register must be able to trace any piece of lifting equipment back to a current
load test certificate. Every effort must be made to retain the original manufacturer
certificate aboard the installation. All lifting appliances must be included in a planned
maintenance system.
A system that uniquely identifies the Safe Working Load (SWL), inspection
frequency and individual identification of each piece of lifting equipment and each
padeye must be maintained at each installation and facility.
A competent person must inspect all lifting equipment and padeyes at least every 12
months. A record of that inspection must be kept at the installation or facility. All
recommendations made within the report must be acted upon and, if necessary,
inserted in the FOCUS Planning and Tracking software.
Color coding must be used to clearly identify the last inspection date of all lifting
equipment. The table below describes the Company color coding system to be
utilized at installations and facilities.
In the event the color code for a specific year conflicts with an external source, such
as client requirements, the color scheme may be reversed.
All new lifting equipment placed in service shall be marked with the current color
code.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Lifting equipment must be used only for the specific purpose for which it was
designed. Before a lifting operation commences the following checks must be made:
• A SWL must be clearly marked on the lifting appliance
• The weight of the load must be within the SWL rating of the lifting appliance
• The lifting gear and appliance has been inspected and marked with the
current color code
• The lifting gear and appliance do not display any visual signs of damage
Any item of lifting equipment subjected to repair or alteration in the design must be
re-certified and authorized for use before being reinstated. For example, a padeye
welded on at the wrong load-pull angle should not be used until it is welded on at the
correct pull angle, to avoid side loading. The padeye must be re-certified following
the repair.
Natural or manmade fiber rope must not be used for lifting purposes. Recommended
rope usage includes tag lines for moving cargo, tailing casing, and securing items.
Tag lines must be used to assist with the control of loads handled by the crane
within the installation. Sufficient taglines should be used whenever practicable for
the transfer of loads to and from the installation.
Chains must not be used for lifting purposes with the exception of:
• Bushing pullers
• Manual and powered chain hoists (for example: stabbing board and BOP
handling hoists).
• Specialized sea fastenings
• Tail chain equipped to monkey board pullback tugger
4.2 PADEYES
All existing padeyes must be machine fabricated. This may include padeyes with a
drilled bore, plasma cut bore, or forged bore design. Plasma cut bores should
represent a finish and tolerance standard equal to a drilled bore.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Special use or seldom used padeyes are exempt from annual inspection and color
coding provided they are clearly identifiable by red paint and physically locked out of
service. These padeyes must be inspected and load tested prior to return to service.
A log of locked out padeyes must be maintained aboard the installation.
For padeyes with rated loads exceeding 6 short tons, the padeye must be designed
and engineered by Transocean Engineering Department.
Pre-fabricated padeyes should be obtained and made available for new installation
and use. All padeyes must be provided with supporting design calculations, material
specifications and approved welding procedures.
After installation, all welds must be thoroughly inspected to locate defects such as
surface cracks, surface porosity, incomplete root penetration and undercut.
After the installation of a padeye, proof load test with load at 150% of the rated load
must be performed. The load test must include the side load conditions that the
padeye is designed to handle. Items in the test assembly must be inspected and
their SWL at least that of the proof load being applied to the item being proof loaded.
After the proof load test, the padeye, welds, and all lifting gear used to perform the
test must be inspected to observe whether any part has been damaged or
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
permanently deformed by the test, and whether any crack in the welds has been
initiated. This will be confirmed by both visual inspection and non-destructive tests,
either Liquid (Dye) Penetrate Examination conforming to ASTM E165 or wet
Magnetic Particle Examination conforming to ASTM E709.
Padeyes to be installed onto the following structures, for the purpose of supporting
loads, require prior Engineering approval:
• Derrick
• Crown Block
• Piping
• Side shell
• Jackup legs
• Diagonal and horizontal braces of semi-submersible’s hull
• Any other structure where high strength steel alloys are believed to have
been used
All tugger winches must be maintained in good working order and ready for
immediate use. Any defects must be reported immediately.
A ball valve must be fitted on the supply line adjacent to each tugger winch to allow
rapid shutdown.
The working end of a tugger wire must be color-coded the same as the tugger. This
is to provide a means for the tugger operator to visually monitor which wire he is
controlling. This must be verified during pre-use inspection.
The working end of tugger winch wires must not be wrapped around equipment for
hoisting or pulling. Slings and snatch blocks must be correctly used to avoid
damaging the tugger wires.
Rig floor tugger lines used for picking up and laying down tubulars must be equipped
with a shackle and ball bearing swivel of adequate SWL.
Hooks must not be used on tuggers for lifting purposes with the exception of:
• Diverter packer element
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
The following checks should be made before using any tugger winch:
• There is enough wire on the drum. (Always leave a minimum of five wraps on
the winch drum.)
• The wire is evenly and tightly spooled with no apparent defects or damage.
• Winch drum guards are in place.
• Control levers are clearly marked “Up” and “Down.”
• Tugger brake is operational and hoist controls return to neutral when released
• Load weight is within the SWL of the tugger
Only trained and authorized personnel may operate tugger winches. (See Section 4
Subsection 1.3) and must ensure the following is adhered to:
• Personnel are standing clear of all wire, ropes and moving equipment.
• Direct full attention to the lifting operation .
• Maintain clear visual contact with the lifting operation. If this is not practicable,
a banksman must be deployed.
• Stand on the correct side of the tugger when operating the controls.
• Never leave the winch running unattended.
• Never exceed the SWL of the wire/winch in use.
• Never touch the wire by hand.
4.4 MANRIDING
Due to the relatively high risk of personal injury during manriding operations, ALL
alternative methods of accomplishing the job must be considered prior to manriding
operations being authorized.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
A written THINK plan must be led by the Toolpusher or OIM before beginning any
manriding operations. Depending on the planned operation, a Permit to Work may
be required. The START process must be used to monitor the work, and if any
changes occur, the work should be interrupted and the written THINK plan revised.
As a minimum, the THINK plan must include:
• consideration of a contingency rescue/recovery plan in the event of possible
equipment failure or power loss
• weather and lighting conditions
• counter balancing effects of the winch wire
Work that might interfere with the manriding operation must be assessed, and if
necessary, suspended.
The person in charge of the manriding area may only select trained personnel to
perform the manriding operations. Everyone involved in winch/tugger operations
must have successfully completed Company approved manriding awareness
training and a practical exercise using installation specific equipment. (See Section
4 Subsection 1.3)
All winches used for manriding must be designed for manriding and be inherently
safe (that is, no clutch mechanism and no possibility for the winch to go into
freewheeling mode).
General-use winches may not be used for hoisting personnel unless also designed
and approved by manufacturer for manriding.
All winches used for manriding (both dedicated and general use/manrider approved)
must have the following features, as a minimum:
• Manufacturer label indicating operational parameters and approval for
manriding.
• A sign affixed to winch clearly indicating suitability for manriding (for example,
“SUITABLE FOR MANRIDING”).
• The winch operating lever must automatically return to neutral when released
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
• An automatic brake that will engage upon returning the operating lever to
neutral or on loss of power.
• A secondary braking system for the wire drum that functions in the event the
automatic brake fails or does not engage. This brake may be automated or
manual.
• A guide (manual or automatic) for spooling the wire rope onto the drum.
• Have an OEM approved procedure, or be supplied from an air pressure
vessel or hydraulic accumulator bank with sufficient reserve capacity
available, to lower rider in a controlled manner in the event of the loss of main
rig power.
• An emergency shut off valve to isolate air or hydraulic power to the winch
located within the winch operator's reach.
• Air or hydraulic supply to hoist must be regulated to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure.
• Non-rotating wire must be used on dedicated manrider winches.
Personnel being lifted must wear a Company approved full-body harness that is in
good condition. A triple action carabiner must be used to attach the safety harness
directly to the hoist wire.
During manriding operations, care must be exercised to ensure that the person
being lifted is not put at risk of being jammed under any obstructions.
The Company does not mandate the use of secondary fall protection during
manriding operations. However, all client and regulatory requirements must be
complied with.
Hand signals must be used as the primary means of communication for all manriding
operations. If, at any time, hand signals cannot be used as the primary means of
communication, the written THINK Plan for manriding must be reviewed and further
risk assessment performed. Following this review the department supervisor must
re-approve the written THINK Plan.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Manriding underneath the drill floor in the moonpool or cellar deck area using a
winch from the drill floor is prohibited.
Controls must be in place to prevent the risk of any objects being dropped. All tools
and equipment carried aloft must be tied off at all times.
All air tuggers must be operated according to the manufacturer's instructions and
fitted with drum guards and control levers that are clearly marked "Up" and "Down."
The winch operator must not leave the controls at any time during a manriding
operation.
A person other than the one being lifted must visually inspect the harness for proper
fitting and safe attachment to the lifting wire before manriding.
Due to the risk of personal injury during lifting of personnel, lifting equipment used
for lifting personnel must be certified for the purpose.
During the THINK Planning stage of all tasks where the lifting of personnel is
required, controls must be utilized to reduce the likelihood of an incident occurring
from people from being crushed, trapped, struck by or falling from the equipment.
“Rescue from Heights” must be part of the THINK plan when lifting of personnel is
involved.
Personnel being lifted must utilize fall protection when working inboard the
installation or from a Spider basket. The use of fall protection equipment is not a
requirement when utilizing a totally enclosed elevator in the derrick, column,
accommodation, and so on.
If access doors are fitted to the carrier they should not open outwards and should be
fitted with a device to prevent inadvertent opening. A means of rescue must be
available on the installation in the event of loss of power or malfunction of the lifting
equipment.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Personnel utilizing scissor lifts and boom supported work baskets must be trained in
their safe operation. There must be a standby man at the worksite to monitor
operations and they must be in constant verbal and visual contact of the personnel
operating the equipment.
Controls must be utilized to prevent the Scissor Lift or Boom Supported Work Basket
from being struck by other lifting equipment or load.
Scissor lifts and Boom Supported Work Baskets must be fitted with an emergency
stop at the control points. These stops must be easily reached and actuated.
Scissor lifts must be stabilized and located on a solid, level foundation to prevent
them from rocking or moving due to weather conditions and/or vessel motion.
Risks to assess as part of the THINK planning process before and while monitoring
the task include but are not limited to the following:
• Electric shock – contact between lifting equipment and electrical wiring
• Caught between – piping, beams, overhead walkways, cables, and so on
• Tipover – inadequate stabilzation, equipment failure, struck by external force,
exceeding rated capacity of equipment
• Falls – thrown from basket by lift striking against fixed structure or struck by,
personnel overreaching from basket
• Struck by – dropped objects
All personnel elevators must be included in the planned maintenance system and
the lifting gear register. These must be inspected by specialized third party
personnel.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
When utilizing a work basket, the total weight of the basket, equipment and
personnel must be determined to ensure the safe working load of the lifting
appliance is not exceeded. Grab rails must be fitted inside the basket to prevent
personnel exposing their hands to caught between/crush points.
Personnel riding in the basket must use fall protection unless working over the
water. Consideration should be given to utilizing a tie off point independent of the
basket.
When utilizing a spider basket, the total weight of the basket, equipment and
personnel must be determined to ensure the safe working load of the lifting
appliance is not exceeded. Grab rails must be fitted inside the basket to prevent
personnel exposing their hands to caught between/crush points.
A drilling line record containing the line certificate or origin, service date, slipping and
cutting details, as well as record of inspections must be kept on all installations.
After slipping and cutting, the crown-o-matic must be reset and tested.
The line pull reading must be available at all times by a maintained and calibrated
weight indicator.
No part of the drilling line must be in contact with the metal components of the
installation that may damage the cable.
During slip and cut operations the travelling equipment (blocks and hook) must be
properly secured so that inadvertent movement is not possible. (For example, with
hang-off pendants)
4.7.2 WIRE
• Wire must always be secured to the winch drum with at least five wire wraps
on the drum when in use.
Slings made of synthetic fiber may be used in special cases, for example lifting of
chromium pipes, special drill pipe, engine cylinder heads, and so on. A Permit to
Work must be issued for their use.
The storage and handling of webbing slings must be strictly controlled to conserve
condition and prevent contamination.
All web slings must be discarded after one year in service with the exception of
special application slings.
Loose eyebolts screwed into holes provided in the equipment to be lifted, must have
sufficient strength and be screwed entirely in and correctly oriented.
Perform the lifting on the eye as vertically as possible in order to prevent bending
and eventually breaking the eyebolt.
For lifting barrels made of plastic or PVC, do not use the conventional barrel slings
of chain and hooks. Using a net, basket or specialized device is recommended.
4.7.6 HOOKS
Slings or positive locking pipe hooks must be used when lifting casing by the box
and pin ends with a crane within the confines of the installation.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Pipe hooks may not be used for loading/off loading of tubulars to or from a supply
boat. All tubulars must be pre-slung.
Any wires that have been re-terminated onboard must be load tested, documented
and authorized for use.
4.7.8 ALL OTHER LIFTING GEAR AND APPLIANCES (CHAIN BLOCKS, SNATCH
BLOCKS, TROLLEYS, SHACKLES, AND SO ON.)
Any damage detected must be reported and appliances taken out of service for
repair.
When planning all crane and lifting operations the hazards must be identified and the
risk reduced. The factors that must be considered include:
• The type of load being lifted, its weight, and shape (wind effect).
• The preventive controls to reduce the likelihood of a load falling or striking a
person or object and the mitigating controls to reduce the consequences.
• The preventive controls to reduce the likelihood of the lifting equipment falling,
striking a person or some other object and the mitigating controls to reduce
the consequences.
• The selection of the lifting equipment to reduce ergonomic risk.
• Operating limits of lifting equipment (static and dynamic loading).
• Inspection of lifting gear for defects prior to use:
− Special straps – damaged, cut, abraded or stretched;
− Chains – deformed or stretched links, cracks; and
− Wire ropes – broken wires or kinks.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
A Lift Plan or checklist should be considered to ensure all hazards have been
identified and risks reduced. For more information on Lift Plans see HQS-HSE-HB-
01 Lifting Operations Handbook.
Crane Operators must verify correct rigging arrangements prior to all crane lifts.
Each Crane Operator must be certified for the type of crane to be operated, by a
Company approved instructor meeting Company specified criteria.
Each Crane Operator must complete the ‘OJT’ Module for Crane Operator prior to
demonstrating their knowledge to the OIM.
The OIM must authorize Crane Operators to operate cranes on the installation. A list
of authorized crane operators must be available at the worksite.
Only Crane Operators authorized by the OIM can train or instruct trainees.
Trainee(s) must not operate the crane without an authorized operator present.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
It is the responsibility of the Crane Operator to verify the weight of each load before
proceeding with offload and backload to supply vessels by:
• Reviewing Cargo Manifest to identify weight of loads,
• Communicate with supply vessel or supervisor on deck to verify the load
being lifted is the correct item listed on the manifest and,
• When initially lifting the load monitor weight indicator to verify weight of load is
as expected, if not load is to be lowered and landed immediately.
Crane Operators must be able to clearly communicate with the handling crew, only
one of which may be designated as the banksman. If the crane operator receives
instructions or signals from more than one person at a time, the crane operator must
interrupt the operation. If the Crane Operator cannot see the banksman at any time
when the load is being moved, he must immediately interrupt the operation and only
resume when he has re-established visual contact with the banksman.
4.8.2 BANKSMAN
The Banksman will have no other duties while so assigned. Banksmen may not
participate in simultaneous operations (for example, supervising the lift while
supervising boat operations alongside the installation). For boat operations it may be
necessary to assign a banksman for the boat as well as a banksman on the
installation.
The designated banksman must be easily identified as such (for example, wearing a
special color vest).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 16 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
• Ensure prior to lifting the load that it is not secured to the deck, transportation
cradle, or could become entangled in adjacent equipment.
• Ensure that tag lines in use are not secured or tied off to adjacent equipment
or structures.
The banksman must not become involved in physically handling lifts. The Crane
Operator must interrupt the operation immediately if this occurs.
Hand signals must be used as the primary means of communication for all crane
signaling. Radios may be used in conjunction with hand signals, but they are
considered secondary. Boom cameras may not be used as a means of
communication.
Hand signals used on all installations must be available and must be understood by
every person involved in crane and lifting operations.
The crane must not be used for operations where the angle indicates that damage
may occur to wires or sheaves.
The crane boom must not be used as a ladder or gangway. Personnel performing
work on the crane boom must always address the hazard of falling.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
All hooks on the travelling blocks, whip line and safety slings must have positive
locking safety latches that are in good working order.
When a crane is shut down, all controls must be left in the neutral position and the
brakes locked. Where applicable, the rotation lock must be engaged at all times
when the crane is unattended.
Only competent operators are authorized to operate BOP cranes, BOP handlers,
pipe handling cranes, gantry cranes, and overhead trolley/beam mounted cranes at
Company installations and facilities. Exceptions are made for the training of new
operators, or in connection with maintenance work.
Cranes which operate on rails located at deck level (main deck or elevated level)
must be provided with audible and visual warnings which alert everyone in the area
when the crane is traveling.
All overhead crane operations must have a designated operator. The operator will
not be involved in material handling/ positioning of loads while operating the crane.
All overhead crane operations will have, in addition to the designated crane
operator, one employee designated for monitoring/positioning the crane load.
All cranes must be fitted with an emergency stop device (ESD) at the level of the
rails accessible by personnel in the area.
Any cargo carrying unit fitted with ISO lifting blocks must not be modified without
engineering approval.
All lifting gear used in conjunction with ISO lifting blocks must be fit for purpose. For
additional information on sling configuration and ISO containers see HQS-HSE-HB-
01 Lifting Operations Handbook.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
4.9 FORKLIFTS
All installations and facilities must carry out training unique and specific to the
forklift(s) found there. The training must cover both theory and practical
demonstration. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3) A record must be kept of this
training.
The OIM must approve the content and instructors for all forklift training given
onboard.
Only competent forklift operators who have completed Company approved training
are authorized to operate forklifts. A list of competent forklift operators must be
available at the work site.
Forklifts must be maintained and rated to meet the zone classifications of the area in
which they are to operate.
The forks must be lowered to the lowest practical position to provide maximum view
and stability. The mast must be tilted backwards to increase load stability.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 20 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Forklifts should only be used on flat, level surfaces and must carry loads within their
rated capacity.
Forklifts should be driven in reverse when high loads restrict forward vision.
Drivers must not drive over unprotected cables, pipes, and so on.
When left unattended, forklifts must be in neutral with the parking brake on, the forks
lowered and the power switched off.
Forklifts should not be parked in an enclosed area with the engine running.
If a forklift was manufactured with a seat belt, one must be fitted and worn by the
operator while the forklift is in use.
A basket engineered and manufactured for the purpose of lifting personnel may be
used to lift personnel to perform routine maintenance work. This may take place
when other means of access are considered impractical, and only after a
documented risk assessment (Written THINK Plan as a minimum) has been
performed and signed by the OIM or designee. This basket must be treated as a
piece of lifting equipment and inspected as such.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
5.3 BANKSMAN:
• Do not perform other duties while so assigned.
• Do not participate in simultaneous operations.
• Successfully complete a course in rigging practices prior to being assigned as
a banksman.
5.6 OIM:
• Authorize Crane Operators to train or instruct trainees.
• Approve risk assessments in the event that hand signals cannot be used as
the primary means of communication during any manriding operation.
• Approve risk assessments for any operations involving any purpose-made
lifting basket to lift personnel in connection with routine maintenance work.
• Ensure a list of authorized crane operators is available at the work site.
• Ensure a list of authorized forklift operators is available at the work site.
• Approve the content and instructors for all forklift training given onboard the
installation.
• Ensure that a Lifting Equipment Register is maintained on the installation.
6 DOCUMENTATION
• The Crane Signals (Figure A) is included in the manual to illustrate the type of
hand signals which all personnel involved in Crane operations must be aware
of for their primary means of communication. It is included in the manual as
an example only and is intended to allow operations to take advantage of a
preset informative poster. It is not mandatory that these actual signals are
used on an installation/facility It is mandatory that “hand signals to be used”
are approved by Business Unit Management and that these are clearly
understood and posted at the installation/facility. The signals approved by
Business Unit Management must include key elements of the Crane Signals
(Figure A) included in the example shown.
• The Manriding Signals (Figure B) included in this manual are mandatory and
are not to be modified from the original format. Personnel involved in
manriding operations must be aware of them, utilize them and they must be
clearly posted in appropriate areas.
• A register of all lifting equipment must be maintained and documented for the
installation/facility (normally supplied by lifting equipment inspectors following
annual inspections).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 24 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 25 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.6
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Mechanical Lifting
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 26 26
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to heighten the awareness of personnel and reduce
exposure to harmful effects associated with hazardous materials onshore and
offshore.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
Personnel who are required to handle hazardous materials must be made aware of
the hazards, the nature of the material, risks created by exposure, safe handling
instructions, precautions to be taken, use of PPE, emergency procedures and proper
storage instructions for the materials.
4.1 TRAINING
At least one materials person that has attended a Unit approved course in the
handling/shipping of hazardous materials must be onboard at all times. (See
Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
A MSDS must be available for use in the THINK plan prior to offloading any
hazardous materials onto an installation or at a facility.
A system that ensures up to date MSDS are available for all hazardous materials
being used or stored at the installation or facility must be in place and maintained by
the Installation Medical Person.
Hazardous materials must be labeled to indicate the name or trade name of the
material, and the Hazardous Materials Identification System (HMIS) information.
This information must be in English and the predominant local language.
During storage, all hazardous material must be arranged so HMIS markings are
clearly visible.
Food goods must be stored away from any chemicals or other hazardous materials.
Oxidizing agents, such as nitric acid, must be stored away from combustible
materials.
When products covered by this procedure are packaged for shipment, the trained
materials person must supervise the work and the following must be observed:
• Products that may react with one another must be separated.
• All material must be properly secured.
• If a container is used to ship more than one material, it must be marked with
the symbol for the most hazardous material stored within the container.
• The cargo manifests must indicate the following in sequential order:
(proper/scientific) shipping name, hazard class, identification number UN #,
package group (S.H.I.P.).
• Hazardous materials/waste must appear first on the manifest, or be clearly
identified by use of a box or “Hazardous” column. Additionally, the S.H.I.P.
must be the only entry on the first line. Additional lines below the S.H.I.P. may
be used to describe the product for internal or third party ease.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
A system must be developed and maintained to ensure that the OIM or designee is
aware of the location of all types and quantities of all hazardous materials that are
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
onboard the installation or at any facility. The inventory of hazardous materials must
be regularly checked.
The Hazardous Material Identification System (HMIS) must be used to ensure that
relevant information from MSDS concerning the handling and use of hazardous
material is readily available in the storage and handling areas and MSDS referred to
as required for additional information.
The inventory of hazardous materials by location and type must be made available
to the Emergency Response Teams.
The PPE stated on the HMIS placard must be used as a minimum requirement.
A THINK plan must be conducted before hazardous materials are unloaded from
supply vessels and the relevant information from MSDS or HMIS specific to the
chemicals must be discussed and understood by all personnel involved in the
operation.
Containers and sacks should be inspected for leaks, rips or tears prior to use.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
Sacks should be set down easily to prevent tearing. Sacked material should be
placed with the mouth of the sack toward the inside of the pile when stacking.
Empty sacks must be disposed of properly and excess chemicals cleaned up. On
completion of the work, residue on gloves, boots, aprons and other protective
clothing should be appropriately cleaned. When necessary, personnel involved
should take showers as soon as possible after completion of the work.
Proper safety precautions must be followed when working with flammable solvents.
There must be adequate ventilation in enclosed spaces.
The use of solvents to clean hands or skin is not permitted. If clothes become
soaked with solvent, they must be removed and a shower must be taken.
Personnel must not eat, drink, or touch eyes, nose or mouth after handling
hazardous materials without first washing hands with soap and water.
The OIM/Facility Manager must be responsible for the placement and security of any
such materials brought onboard an installation or to a facility.
All such materials must be stored in an approved and secured area away from
passageways, living quarters or areas that are usually manned. Storage containers
must be closed and locked at all times and clearly identified with appropriate labels.
All such storage areas must be clearly marked and designated as an approved
storage area.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
All work involved in the transfer of concentrated acid and other such dangerous
liquid requires a Permit to Work.
All assigned personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing, such as resistant
suits, rubber boots, gloves and face visors.
All transfer equipment must be pressure tested before introducing dangerous liquid
into the system.
All areas where pumping equipment is located (including flow lines) must have a
barrier, and warning notices must be posted prohibiting unauthorized access.
An isolation valve must be located near, but not underneath, the holding tank and a
member of the work party stationed nearby. The valve must be closed if a leak
develops in the system.
Water hoses must be run to appropriate work locations before pumping the
dangerous liquid, and the water supply must be checked.
Spill trays must be provided at all critical points within the work area.
Storage containers should have suitable means for safely extracting the contents.
Flammable liquids such as gasoline, diesel or helicopter fuel must not be used for
cleaning purposes. Non-flammable products must be used, preferably non-toxic and
biodegradable.
Storage areas must have containment facilities to prevent spillage and minimize fire
hazards.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
4.10 CONTAINERS
All bottles, drums or other such vessels must be clearly labeled with contents and
appropriate warning notices. This information must be in English and the
predominant local language.
Empty drums must be kept in a secure area until they can be shipped ashore.
45/55 gallon drums must not be modified in any way or used other than originally
intended; they must not be used for trash, work platforms, storage of protectors, and
so on.
Hot work must never be performed on or near any drum or other container that
contains or previously contained hazardous materials.
4.11 PAINT
All paint products and thinners must be stored in closed containers and stored in
designated paint lockers.
Paint lockers must be in designated areas and marked with appropriate safety signs
and warnings.
When using spray equipment, painters must wear filter masks, goggles and further
appropriate PPE. Exposed skin must be coated with barrier cream as a minimum.
4.12 ASBESTOS
request. Steps must be taken to identify and clearly mark any asbestos or Asbestos
Containing Materials (ACM) at Company installations and facilities.
All personnel must be made aware of the hazards of asbestos exposure. (See
Section 4 Subsection 1.3) Personnel must be made aware of the extent of
asbestos if there is any at the installation or facility.
Radio silence normally occurs in conjunction with an operation that requires a Permit
to Work (for example, use of explosives).
The OIM or designee must coordinate the preparations and the monitoring of the
period of radio silence.
Radio Silence is not required if specific devices are used. These devices are
detailed in HQS-OPS-TIB-093-001.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
• When radio silence has been requested, the Radio Operator must inform the
OIM so an assessment can be made of the safety implications associated
with suspending the installation communications at that time (for example,
supply vessel alongside, divers in the water, helicopter due, and so on.)
• Suspend all hot work, work over the side, or any other work covered by the
Permit to Work system that may affect or be affected by a safe period of radio
silence.
• Isolation performed, tags posted and reporting of the following must be
completed:
1. Welding plants
2. Crane radios
3. Lifeboat radios
4. Top drive
5. Impressed current systems (this does not include anti-fouling/corrosion
reduction systems for internal pipe work)
6. Radar
7. Portable gas detectors (if not intrinsically safe)
All portable VHF and UHF sets to be returned and checked (subcontractors, such as
divers, must ensure all their portable and fixed radios are accounted for and
immobilized).
Inform standby vessel to proceed outside the 500m zone and act as a guard ship
while maintaining radio watch on VHF Channel 16 and any additional frequencies
which may be in use in the field such as, company radios and helicopter air band
radios.
Dependent upon the location, all installations in the vicinity are to be informed. This
is of vital importance if the installation is involved in combined operations with
another installation.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
Radio Operator must send via telex, fax, email, or phone a notice advising of radio
silence, giving the approximate length of time the installation must be in radio
silence, to the following parties:
• Division or base office
• Client
• Helicopter company
NOTE: If a helicopter is in the air and inbound for the installation, radio silence
must not commence until the helicopter has departed the installation.
A second telex, fax, email or phone call must be sent when the installation is out of
radio silence.
All periods of radio silence must be recorded in the installation's radio and marine
log.
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
• Ensure the packaging and manifesting for shipment of all hazardous material
meets both company and regulatory requirements.
• Ensure that an applicable MSDS is received with all hazardous materials
received at the location.
• Ensure MSDSs for received Hazardous materials are forwarded to the
Installation Medical Person.
5.5 OIM:
• Ensure a THINK plan is conducted before hazardous materials are unloaded
from supply vessels and the relevant information from MSDS or HMIS specific
to the chemicals is discussed and understood.
• Ensure subcontractor personnel handling hazardous materials have
applicable training and documentation to handle explosives, radioactive
materials, dangerous liquids and gasses and approve those personnel to
handle these materials at the installation or facility. (See Section 4
Subsection 2.3)
• Be responsible for the placement and security of any explosives, radioactive
materials, dangerous liquids or gases brought onboard an installation or to a
facility.
• Ensure a survey is conducted to determine the extent of asbestos, the results
are documented and retained, and made available upon request.
• Coordinate the preparations and the monitoring of the period of radio silence.
• Ensure all periods of radio silence are recorded in the installation's radio and
marine log.
6 DOCUMENTATION
The forms indicated below are included in the manual as examples only and are
intended to allow operations to take advantage of a preset form rather than having to
create their own. Use of these forms is not mandatory. However, if the examples
are not used exactly as included, the forms used must include the key elements of
the examples and must be approved by the Business Unit Vice President.
• Radio Silence THINK Checklist (Figure A)
(Must be retained in the installation files for a period of one year.)
• S.H.I.P. Manifest (Figure B)
(Must be retained in the installation files for a period of one year.)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.7
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Hazardous Materials
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.8
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Personal Impairment
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to reduce the risk of incidents caused by an individual’s
impairment.
3 SCOPE
4 PROCEDURE
Efforts must be made to ensure that personnel are not allowed to work while
impaired physically, emotionally or mentally.
Some forms of impairment can be difficult to recognize by people other than the
person affected. Personnel must be actively encouraged to alert their supervisor or
co-workers if they feel they are unable to perform their duties at full capacity.
Any person who suspects a co-worker to be impaired in any way must bring the
situation to the attention of the supervisor in charge.
Should any form of impairment be identified or suspected, the person affected must
be assessed and given immediate appropriate care. The person must not return to
normal duties until the impairment has been dealt with and no longer adversely
affects or puts at risk the individual, others, the environment or Company property.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.8
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Personal Impairment
All working hours must be monitored. Work should be planned and resources
allocated to ensure additional working hours are not required. If this is not possible,
any requirement for personnel to work additional hours must be approved by the
OIM/Facility Manager/Office Department Head.
For any person to work in excess of a 16 hour continuous period the following
factors must be considered:
• The nature of the demands (physical and mental) during both the previous 16
hours.
• The nature of the demands (physical and mental) for the extended work
period.
• The working environment – noise, temperature, and weather conditions.
• Type of work – supervisory, administrative, or manual.
• Self supervision or working alone.
• Is the task HSE critical?
Personnel must have a minimum 6 hour rest period after any extended work period.
Emotional impairment could be caused by severe rage, upsetting news from home
or the work place, depression, excitement, or other emotions.
Each Business Unit must have a system in place to identify when grief counseling
may be needed. If a need for grief counseling is identified, it should be provided for
personnel as soon as practicable.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.8
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Personal Impairment
5 RESPONSIBILITY
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety
1 POLICY
Only competent personnel authorized by the OIM may perform electrical work.
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to protect personnel and equipment from the hazards
associated with electricity.
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees of any client, contractor or outside agency that
work at any Company installation or facility.
4 PROCEDURE
For the purpose of this policy and procedure electrical systems and equipment
includes electronic systems and equipment.
The OIM must designate a specific person as the electrical responsible person for
the installation. Only personnel authorized by the electrical responsible person who
have undergone approved electrical safety training and those under training may
perform any work on electrical equipment. (See Section 4 Subsection 1.3)
All electrical faults must be reported as soon as possible to the electrical responsible
person or designee.
All electrical systems and equipment must be installed, operated and maintained in a
safe manner.
Ladders and steps used for working on electrical equipment must be constructed
from non-conductive materials. (See Section 4 Subsection 5.3).
Hand held tools and portable apparatus may be subject to extreme abuse of
insulation, which could allow the casing to become live. It is essential to use
equipment that withstands the particularly adverse conditions found on an
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety
All portable electrical equipment, including flexible cables and cords, must be
permanently numbered and clearly identified with the last inspection date and
regularly maintained through the planned maintenance system. Flexible cables and
cords must be in a sound condition and not kinked or damaged in any way. All
defective cables must be withdrawn from service.
All test and calibration equipment must be maintained and checked for accuracy
against independently certified calibration equipment.
The electrical responsible person must check all portable electrical apparatus or
electrically driven equipment brought onto an installation for general condition and
verification of “fitness for purpose.” (See Section 4 Subsection 2.3)
A system must be in place to ensure the safe use of personal electrical apparatus,
for example, TV’s, video players, electric shavers, and so on.
All portable electrical apparatus (tools, leads, flexible cables, cords and crossovers,
and so on) intended for use in hazardous areas must be of a type certified by an
approved body for use in hazardous areas.
Approved air driven portable tools must be used in hazardous areas when portable
electrical apparatus, tools, cross-overs, GFCIs, and so on, are not of the type
certified by an approved body for use in hazardous areas.
When not in use, portable apparatus must be left switched off and disconnected
from the supply. Portable equipment and flexible cables must be removed from the
work area and suitably stored so they are not likely to cause or be damaged.
Portable electrical hand tools must not have the capability to be locked in the “On”
position.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety
4.3 GENERAL
Metal watchstraps and conductive bracelets must not be worn when working on or
near electrical components due to the hazards of electrical shock.
All entryways to switchgear rooms must have posted notices stating “Danger-High
Voltage.”
Any instructions to make apparatus “live” or “dead” must be given verbally or written
at the time and not by a pre-arranged signal.
No circuit breaker may be reset after a fault trip until the cause of tripping has been
definitely ascertained, except at the discretion of the electrical responsible person.
Switchgear rooms, transformer rooms and bays may not be used for general
storage. The switchgear and floors of these rooms must be kept clear of all materials
and obstructions.
Only authorized persons may perform the testing and adjustments of safety devices.
All electrical panels and enclosures containing electrical switchgear must have their
integrity fully intact, e.g. all securing bolts in place, redundant openings and glands
sealed.
All personnel performing electrical work must be made aware of the special
considerations involved with testing or performing work on high voltage.
To ensure high voltage systems are dead, testing may only be performed with use of
a live line tester. A suitable risk assessment must be performed prior to this task.
All personnel performing work on high voltage systems must receive training by a
Company approved instructor.
There must be two electrical personnel present while maintenance, testing or repair
work is being performed on high voltage equipment.
When testing of live high voltage equipment must be performed, appropriately rated
equipment with fused leads and probes must be used. High Voltage test equipment
must be inspected prior to use.
To ensure that the risk to personnel is minimized all conductors should be grounded
using grounding devices or leads applied to all points where the circuit or equipment
is isolated from the supply. Additional grounds at the point of work may also be
necessary if this is remote from the point of isolation. Additional grounds should be
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety
applied ONLY after proving the circuit dead at the point of work. This procedure is
essential for high voltage and stored energy equipment (containing capacitors). All
grounding conductors and their connections must be rated for the potential circuit
energy in the event of a failure of precautions.
4.5.1 RESCUE
The specific procedures for treating persons suffering from electric shock must be
displayed in all switchgear/transformer rooms. All persons engaged in electrical work
must familiarize themselves with these instructions.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety
Fire fighting equipment using water or foam must not be used on electrical
apparatus. Extinguishing agents suitable for dealing with fires involving electrical
equipment and switchgear are, in order of preference:
• Carbon Dioxide
• Dry Powder
• Class D type fire extinguishers
Fire fighting appliances containing any one of these agents may be used in the
vicinity of live electrical apparatus provided that safe distances are kept between the
extinguishers and live parts. It is preferable to switch off the current if possible. Since
CO2 can prove toxic in confined spaces, everyone (including the person discharging
the extinguisher) should withdraw immediately.
All electrical work in any designated hazardous area or areas in which an explosive
gas mixture is likely to occur in normal operations, requires a Permit to Work.
If, for any particular reason, an electrical apparatus cannot be made dead and is
considered hazardous to life, relevant precautions must be taken and a Permit to
Work must cover the work.
Before any cable is cut it must be made dead, positively identified and, where
practicable, grounded.
During failure of electrical supply, all apparatus, equipment and conductors must be
regarded as being “live” until isolated and tested.
Electrical apparatus and electrically driven equipment must be made safe from any
electrical source by the opening of the appropriate circuit breakers, fused isolators,
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety
All possible back feeds from the low voltage sides of power transformers, voltage
transformers or auxiliary transformers must be isolated.
4.8 BATTERIES
Acid resistant protective clothing must be worn at all times when working with or
immediately near batteries, however minor the work may be. Acid resistant
protective clothing consists of suit, gloves and safety goggles in conjunction with a
face shield.
Only approved insulated tools may be used to connect or disconnect cells. The
insulation on these tools must be in good condition and checked before use. Non-
insulated tools and metal objects must not be used near batteries.
Before cells can be disconnected, battery chargers must be isolated. Before being
disconnected, fully charged batteries should be allowed to stand at least 12 hours
(24 where possible) after charging has ceased.
When a battery is being charged the potential exists for emission of hydrogen and
oxygen gases. No naked lights should be used or any work done that may produce a
spark near batteries on charge.
All efforts must be made to ventilate battery cabinets before work commences.
Batteries must be disposed of properly (sent ashore for recycling when possible).
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5.9
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
IMPLEMENTING AND MONITORING
Electrical Safety
• Verify equipment is electrically dead and any stored energy sources have
been discharged.
5.3 OIM:
• Designate an electrical responsible person for the installation.
• Ensure all relevant personnel are trained in the use of a special insulated tool
for separation of persons from live conductors.
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 8
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
HSE Recognition
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to motivate all personnel to take a proactive role in all
HSE efforts.
The Company recognizes that true HSE motivation lies in proactive leadership and a
person's continued well being. Awards are only a part of the recognition process.
The Company strongly supports the HSE efforts of the individuals and teams and
believes that proactive HSE performance should be recognized.
3 SCOPE
4 PROCEDURE
Individuals and teams must be recognized and rewarded for achieving and
maintaining a high standard of HSE performance.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
HSE Recognition
Each Unit Vice President, Division Manager and Rig Manager must determine the
structure and approval process for the award and recognition system within their
area of responsibility.
An effective way to set and track Unit, Division, installation or facility specific
objectives would be to use key performance indicators that could be a combination
of some of the HSE improvement criteria listed below:
• Proactive promotion and use the Platinum Rule, “Treat people as THEY
NEED to be treated.”
• Effective use of leadership skills in the management of people.
• Effective mentoring of co-workers.
• Imparting a sense of HSE excellence in people and making positive
contributions to the HSE culture of the Company.
• Exhibiting a positive HSE attitude.
• Participation and use of THINK Planning Process.
• Participation and use of START Observation and Monitoring Process.
• Effective and timely close out of FOCUS, Corrective and Improvement
Actions.
• Individual or team participation to facilitate effective HSE meetings.
• Full compliance with the HSE Policies and Procedures.
• Accurate and timely reporting of incidents as defined by the HSE system.
• Holding effective discussions with personnel for the purpose of personal
development and HSE performance recognition as well as providing direction
for HSE improvement. (Mentoring)
• Establishment of installation, facility or personal HSE goals and plans.
• Achievement of installation, facility or personal HSE goals and established
plans (Annual, Quarterly, Monthly).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.1
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
HSE Recognition
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Corporate QHSE Services, Business Unit Vice Presidents, Division Managers and
Rig Managers are responsible for determining the structure and approval process for
the award and recognition system within their area of responsibility.
6 DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process
1 POLICY
2 PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to provide a consistent means of ensuring action points
that add value are completed, Company performance is improved, and lessons
learned made available.
3 SCOPE
4 PROCEDURE
FOCUS enhances the execution of THINK and START within the Management of
Change Process.
The feedback from the FOCUS Improvement Process is lessons learned. Use of
GRS enables the Company to capture lessons learned and to make them available.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process
The first step in the FOCUS Improvement Process is to determine if the opportunity
is “improvement” or “corrective,” as described in paragraph 4.2, “Sources of Outputs
and Results (Opportunities).”
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process
• Define the method the responsible person uses to communicate the planned
actions.
• Responsible person communicates the planned actions to all parties involved
or affected by the proposed changes.
• Submit the plan for approval per established authority limits.
managed. Actions are tracked to ensure they are monitored, followed through and
the results are communicated to those who may benefit from the lessons learned.
The decision to use the FOCUS tool is based on the complexity or criticality of the
actions taken and whether the source of opportunity is discretionary or non-
discretionary.
Mandatory sources of opportunity are sources that the Company has identified as
being important and/or critical to performance. They require the use of the FOCUS
tool to ensure corrective or improvement actions are effectively planned and tracked
to completion. The following list includes all mandatory sources that require using
the FOCUS tool:
• Company management system, SMART - Implementation Plans
• Performance Monitoring Audit and Assessment - Corrective and Improvement
Actions Plans
• ISM Code, ISPS Code, Client, Flag State and Regulatory Audits - Corrective
and Improvement Actions Plans.
• HSE Alerts, Corporate and Unit – Corrective and Preventive Actions
• HSE Incident Analysis Result – Corrective and Improvement Actions Plans
• Service Quality Appraisals - Corrective and Improvement Actions Plans
• HSE Meetings - Corrective and Improvement Actions Plans (See Note.)
NOTE: The use of the FOCUS planning and tracking tool is not required
in the case of action points originating from HSE Meetings where:
• the emphasis is on tracking actions rather than planning action
• a limited work scope is confined to the location
• the risk has been assessed to be minimal
• the simple approach to Management of Change is used
It is recommended managers and supervisors use the FOCUS tool in the case of
discretionary sources when:
• A complex and/or critical situation or action has been identified.
• Managers and supervisors require a formal review and approval process.
• Significant lessons learned must be captured so they are available to users.
• Actions that require an extended period of time to complete (not related to
maintenance or procurement activities).
The following list includes examples of discretionary sources where using the
FOCUS tool is optional (these sources are available for selection in the tool):
• Advisory – Operations, Safety
• Alerts – Client, Equipment, Regulatory
• Annual Installation HSE Plan
• Client/Industry Meeting
• Exemption Request
• Feedback Form
• Lesson Learned*
• Management Review
• Management Visit
• Operational Event Report (OER)
• Security Incident
• START – Monitoring, Observation
• Start-up Plan – Installation, Office/Facility
• Steering Committee Meeting - QHSE
• THINK Plan – HAZOP/HAZID, Individual, MAHRA, Operation Integrity Case,
Safety Case, Task Risk Assessment, Task Specific THINK Procedure,
Verbal, Written
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process
SOURCE OF OPPORTUNITY
(RESULTS AND OUTPUTS)
Type of Opportunity
Preventive Improvement
Is an
Interim Action Action Action
Required?
YES
Interim
NO
Action
Corrective
Action
FOCUS enhances the execution of THINK and START within the Management of
Change Process when Company expertise is requested based on the knowledge,
experience, skills and approval available at the installation or within a work group.
(See Figure B, Management of Change Process)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.2
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
FOCUS Improvement Process
5 RESPONSIBILITY
6 DOCUMENTATION
See the GRS Help file (Online and Rig versions) for information on the use of the
GRS FOCUS planning and tracking tool.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 9
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
1 POLICY
All work related incidents must be reported and reviewed by the Rig Manager.
All non-work related incidents resulting in trauma and requiring care at the
Medical Treatment level must be reported and reviewed by the Rig Manager.
The Rig Manager must evaluate incidents, develop and implement appropriate
improvement opportunities and track performance to confirm effectiveness.
2 PURPOSE
3 SCOPE
This policy also covers employees and property of any Client, Subcontractor or
outside agency that work at any Company installation, facility, or office.
4 PROCEDURE
Only through open and honest reporting can we improve our HSE performance.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
For traumatic events (injuries) resulting in Medical Treatment, the initial factual
points must be reported and documented on an Incident Report form within the
Global Reporting System (GRS) and validated by the Rig Manager before the
conclusion of the next business day.
If the event affects the ability of an employee to perform his routine job functions, the
OIM and the employee’s immediate supervisor must be notified of the employee’s
inability to perform those functions.
Upon return to the installation, Company employees must provide the IMP with a
document signed by the treating physician if:
• a scheduled return crew change was missed as a result of any non-work
related injury or illness, or
• they departed the installation prior to scheduled crew change due to a need to
receive medical care onshore.
The document signed by the treating physician must detail the following:
• Any restrictions
• Any residual effects as a result of the injury or illness
• Any medications prescribed and duration of treatment
• Any follow up care or treatment required
• Physician contact information
Medical care onshore includes treatment of non-work related incidents that occur
while at work and incidents occurring while at home that affects the employee’s
ability to perform routine job functions.
For non-work related incidents, medical care provided onshore is defined as being
provided by the employee’s personal physician or Company authorized physician.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
If any event affects the ability of an employee to perform his routine job functions,
the OIM must be notified of the employee’s inability to perform those functions. This
includes events happening at home while on field break.
The initial factual points must be reported and documented on an Incident Report
form within the Global Reporting System (GRS) and validated by the Rig Manager
before the conclusion of the next business day.
• For work related incidents resulting in injury or illness to personnel, the
Incident Type is “Personnel”.
• Any work related incident resulting in injury or illness to personnel must be
reported on the daily operations report.
B. FATALITY
The Chief Executive Officer and Chief Operations Officer must be notified by the
fastest available means should a fatality occur at any installation, facility or office.
The initial factual points must be reported and documented on an Incident Report
form within the GRS and validated by the Rig Manager before the conclusion of the
next business day.
A. UNSAFE OBSERVATIONS
The initial factual points of any Near Hit or Serious Near Hit must be reported and
documented on an Incident Report form within the GRS and reviewed by the Rig
Manager before the conclusion of the next business day.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
Near Hits must be reported verbally to their supervisor by the persons that witnessed
the event. The OIM must be notified of any Near Hit.
Serious Near Hits must be reported verbally to their supervisor and OIM by the
persons that witnessed the event.
Any Serious Near Hit must be reported on the daily operations report.
4.2 SEVERITY
The Rig Manager, upon review of the Incident Report, must determine the actual
and potential severity of all work-related incidents. The table below outlines the
parameters for assignment of severity.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
Personnel
Severity
Severity Rating
Value
FAC 1
MTC 3
RWC 5
FAT 30
Near Hits and Serious Near Hits result in only potential severity and no actual
severity. Potential severity of a Serious Near Hit is represented in the shaded areas
of Table 1. Potential severity of a Near Hit is represented in the non-shaded areas of
Table 1.
The Potential Severity value does not determine the classification of Near Hit or
Serious Near Hit. The Severity rating determines classification of a Near Hit or
Serious Near Hit.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 5 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
Severity Rate is derived from the cumulative severity values of a series of incidents
that represents relative changes in severity as a function of time.
The Actual Severity Rate represents incident severity over a period of time. The
“Actual Severity Rate” represents the sum of all actual severity values assigned to
incidents occurring in the specified time frame. The “Working Hours” represents the
sum of all working man-hours in the specified time frame.
The Actual Severity Rate is comprised of actual severity values for all categories of
work related personnel injury or illness incidents.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
• The Potential Severity Rate is comprised of potential severity values for work
related personnel injury or illness (all categories) and Near Hits and Serious
Near Hits involving potential personnel injury.
The severity calculator allows the Rig Manager to assign the severity ratings and
carry out on an ongoing basis the computations that result in the severity rate. The
Rig Manager must maintain the severity calculator within the GRS.
The Rig Manager must use the severity values to determine if an action needs to be
taken.
The Division Manager must ensure that the severity calculator is applied in a
consistent manner.
Each Business Unit must have a specific procedure in place for incident analysis
which takes into account the following factors:
• Location of Business Unit and Division Management’s Incident Fact-Finding
Team
• Availability of specialized expertise
• Regulatory requirements
• Geographical locations
• Transportation infrastructure
• Local customs and cultures
Although the Business Unit Incident Analysis procedure is approved by the Business
Unit Vice President, Corporate QHSE Services (in conjunction with the Business
Unit and Division QHSE Manager) must also review the procedure to ensure it
adequately addresses the following:
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
A. COMMUNICATION PLAN
• Establishing a Communication Plan - installations, Clients and Regulatory
Bodies
• Sharing Lessons Learned and Incident Follow up Plans
B. ORGANIZING FACT-FINDING
• Identifying and Collecting Facts - Who, What, Where, When
• Interviewing Witness(s)
• Maintaining a Log of Events
• Summarizing of Facts
• Preserving and Representing Evidence
• Managing Factual Statements
• Defining the Role of Witnesses
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
4.3.1 FACT-FINDING
Designation of the appropriate responsible person for managing the fact-finding step
is determined by the severity value initially assigned by the Rig Manager as it is
applied to the Fact-Finding Table of Responsibilities.
The decision of what resources and personnel are assigned to the fact-finding
process must be based on the areas of expertise required, the level of experience
available, the local environment and the level of direct management involvement
necessary to complete the fact-finding step.
The table below identifies the responsible person for ensuring adequate resources
and trained personnel are assigned to the fact-finding step.
• A – OIM
• B – Rig Manager or Division Manager/Unit Operations Manager
Note: For Near Hits & Serious Near Hits, the potential severity value
determines the incident type.
The following persons may be asked to lead the fact-finding step of the investigation:
• Independent investigator
• Company legal representative
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 9 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
The Management Review of Facts should focus on how to prevent the incident from
happening again and what can be learned from the incident. The Management
Review determines whether corrective and improvement opportunities are needed to
improve safety. Responsibility for ensuring adequate resources for carrying out the
Management Review of Facts is determined by the Division Manager.
Corporate Operations Group conducts the Management Review of Facts for all
fatalities. Business Unit Management may be requested to assist in the fact-finding
step, but the overall responsibility for Management Review of Facts resides with
Corporate Operations Group.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
This information must be reported for the current month, year to date and the 12-
month rolling recordable rate for all “work related” medical treatment cases,
restricted work cases, serious injury cases and fatalities combined into one figure.
Business Units must report to Corporate any personnel unable to return to work as
the result of a Serious Injury Case, including the actual days the individual is unable
to work in any capacity during the reporting period.
The total recordable incident rate tracked by the Company is year-to-date and a
rolling rate over the previous 12 months. To compute the rolling rate, the (MTC +
RWC + SIC + FAT) and the Working Hour figures in the formula above are the
figures for the previous 12-month period. For example, the rolling rate for the month
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 11 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
ending on March 31, 2003 is the figures from April 1, 2002 through March 31, 2003.
The next report at the end of April is from May 1, 2002 through April 30, 2003.
If an installation moves from one Business Unit to another, the working hours and
incidents (if any) remain with the Business Unit that the installation is departing. The
new Business Unit begins counting working hours (man-hours) when the new
Business Unit assumes control of and responsibility for the installation. The hand
over point for the installation is determined by agreement between the two Business
Units involved.
As an installation moves from one Business Unit to another, the YTD TRIR resets to
zero each time; however the 12-month rolling average is calculated from the past 12
calendar months’ working hours and incidents, regardless of area or location of
operation.
The YTD TRIR and 12-month rolling average are used equally together to evaluate
an installation’s safety performance.
The working hours must be tracked separately for Company personnel and
Company hired subcontracted employees.
Transportation to and from the installation and off-tour hours are excluded from the
working hours count.
The working hours and incident data for any “leased laborers” who are under the
direct supervision of the Company must be included with the installation working
hours and incident data for Company personnel. “Leased laborers” are anyone
fulfilling the duties normally undertaken by a Company employee and supplied by
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
Hourly paid Company personnel hours are calculated as the number of hours
reported on the payroll that includes overtime worked.
Salaried/Monthly paid Company personnel who do not have a relief onboard are
calculated as the number of days on the installation times 14 hours per day plus
actual overtime hours worked in any given day.
Salaried/Monthly paid Company personnel that have a relief onboard are calculated
as the number of days on the installation times 12 hours per day plus actual
overtime hours worked in any given day.
The work hours and incident data for these employees must be included in the
Company Hired Subcontractors Statistics.
Working hours for personnel working onshore, not including subcontractor labor,
must be reported separately under Administrative Hours.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
Hourly Company hired subcontractors employee hours are calculated as the number
of working hours reported on their timesheet.
Actual hours of Training Instructors and attendees must be added to the total
Administrative Hours. All training facility hours and any incidents that may occur fall
under the training facility calculations and are added into the administrative statistics.
The day of the injury/occupational illness and the day the individual returns to work
are not to be counted as days unable to work. All other days the individual is unable
to work in any capacity as stated on a doctor’s certificate are counted as days
unable to work. For example: An individual is injured on the 22nd day of a 28-day
“hitch” and is unable to return on their next shift, or any subsequent shift. The actual
workdays and field break days will be counted as days unable to work, until a doctor
releases the injured person for work in any capacity.
ANSI Z16.1 must be used to compute days for death, permanent total and
permanent partial disability. (The ANSI Z16.1 definition is: 6,000 days for each
death, permanent total disability and permanent partial disability.)
The Monthly Statistics Report must be prepared and submitted to Corporate HSE
Services to arrive no later than the third business day after the end of the reported
month. With the deployment of GRS Online version 3.x (May 2004), all Monthly
Statistics Reports will be generated from GRS On-Line. It is the responsibility of
each Rig Manager to ensure the HSE performance incurred and reported within
GRS is accurate and meets the requirements for reporting in section 4.1.3 above.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
B. CORPORATE TO FIELD
5 RESPONSIBILITY
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
5.3 OIM:
• Ensure the initial factual points are reported and documented on an Incident
Report form within the Global Reporting System (GRS) for all required events.
• Ensure any work related FAC, MTC, RWC, SIC and any EVDM, EVDS,
PRDM or PRDS is reported on the daily operations report.
• Ensure adequate resources for fact-finding are allocated, if determined to be
the responsible person by severity assignment.
• Ensure the Monthly Incident Rate Chart is posted for personnel to review.
• Keep the client representative informed of the status of all ongoing medical
events that may require emergency or non-emergency medical evacuation.
• Ensure effective is training is available for the Business Unit Incident Analysis
procedure
• Ensure the procedure to perform Incident Analysis is performed in four
separate and independent components:
1. Fact-Finding
2. Management Review of Facts
3. Communication of corrective and improvement opportunities
4. Follow up and close out of corrective and improvement opportunity
actions
• Ensure there are adequate resources for carrying out the Management
Review of Facts.
• Monitor Division/Sector/Branch management follow up and close out of
FOCUS proposals related to incidents.
6 DOCUMENTATION
The Fact-Finding Guidelines (Figure A) are included in the manual as a tool for an
initial gathering of facts relevant to an incident. It is not a requirement of this policy to
use these guidelines. If these guidelines are used, they should not be considered “all
inclusive” and should be helpful to generate further questions relevant to the
incident.
• Fact Finding Guidelines (Figure A)
The Incident Report form is located within the Global Reporting System (GRS) and
must be completed electronically. The complete Incident Report created in GRS-
Rig/GRS-Online is confidential and must be treated as such. A copy must be printed
and signed to be retained in the installation or facility files for a period of not less
than three years.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 17 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
An abbreviated Incident Report generated from GRS Online is suitable for sharing
the relevant facts of the incident.
The form indicated below is included as an alternate in the event it is not possible to
complete the Incident Report within GRS. Once complete, the signed hard copy is
considered confidential and must be treated as such. Use of this format is
mandatory and is not to be modified. It has been developed by Corporate HSE
Services and is a requirement of this policy.
• Incident Report (Figure B )
(Copies of this form must be signed and retained in the installation or facility
files for a period of not less than three years.)
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 18 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
The intended purpose of these guidelines is to serve as a reminder of the types of items
that might be addressed during the Fact Finding step. The severity and circumstances of
the incident best determine if fewer or more questions, observations, or documentation are
appropriate. The guidelines help keep you on the right track of documenting just the facts
and avoiding opinions.
The key considerations when completing the Fact Finding step include:
• Keep an open mind and maintain a neutral point of view.
• Remember that you are on a fact-finding mission – report the facts only.
• Do NOT form opinions, find fault, or place blame.
• Do NOT speculate what the causes may have been.
• Do NOT speculate what corrective actions might minimize recurrence.
Interviews
• Who witnessed the incident?
• Where were the witnesses when the incident occurred? (Be specific.)
• What did the witnesses see when the incident occurred? (Be specific.)
• What did the witnesses hear when the incident occurred? (Be specific.)
• What did the witnesses feel (physically) when the incident occurred? (Be
specific.)
• What instructions were given to each person before the incident occurred and
who gave the instructions? (Include all crewmembers, injured party,
supervisors and other crewmembers.)
• Who was operating what equipment?
• Where is the equipment located in relation to the incident scene?
• What inspections were performed before the incident occurred, who
performed them and when were they performed? (List all equipment and
material inspections and their findings.)
• What potential hazards were identified before the task was begun and what (if
any) control measures were implemented to ensure it did not result in an
incident?
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 19 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
Interviews (continued)
• What potential hazards were identified when conducting the operation and
what (if any) control measures were implemented to ensure it did not result in
an incident?
• What training had the injured party or other crewmembers received in
conducting the operation underway at the time of the incident?
• What instruction had the injured party or other crewmembers received in
conducting the operation underway at the time of the incident?
• How many times had the injured party or other crewmembers previously
conducted the operation underway at the time of the incident?
Observations
• What were the conditions of the work area where the incident occurred?
(Steps, grating, decking. Be descriptive. For example, “Steps are made of
expanded metal and are free of grease and mud, providing good traction.”).
• What lighting was provided? [Clear skies, (8) 600W lights, and so on. Be
descriptive. For example, “There was enough light to read.”]
• What was the availability of help – mechanical service (in This area, this room
adjacent rooms)?
• What was the availability of cleaning equipment (mops, brooms, and so on, in
this area or room, and adjacent rooms)?
• What (if any) barriers were in place at the time the incident occurred?
• What (if any) lock-out/tag-out devices were in place at the time the incident
occurred?
• What (if any) work permits were in place at the time the incident occurred?
• What personal protective equipment and clothing were being utilized by the
injured party at the time of the incident (boots, gloves, coveralls, hard hats,
safety glasses, safety goggles, safety harnesses, retractable lines, and so
on)?
• What was the condition of the equipment and clothing being used? (Be
descriptive. For example: “Boots were free of oil and mud, and provided good
traction.”)
• What was the availability of personal protective equipment and clothing (in
this area or room, adjacent rooms, and so on.).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 20 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 4
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 6.3
SAFETY POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION
EVALUATING AND IMPROVING
Incident Reporting
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 21 21
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUBSECTION 1 ACRONYMS/ABBREVIATIONS
SUBSECTION 2 DEFINITIONS
SUBSECTION 3 INDEX OF DOCUMENTATION
SUBSECTION 4 FILING OF DOCUMENTATION
SUBSECTION 5 INDEX OF KEYWORDS
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 3 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
ANNEX
ACRONYMS/ABBREVIATIONS
DC Direct Current
FAT Fatality
NH Near Hit
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 1
ANNEX
ACRONYMS/ABBREVIATIONS
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 3
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
All Personnel — All people employed by Transocean or its subsidiaries, including any
employee working as leased labor; any employee of Transocean Subcontractors, Client
and Client Subcontractors; visitors and other relevant stakeholders.
Barrier – Measure which reduces the probability of releasing a hazard’s potential for harm
or which reduces it’s consequences.
Barrier Cream – A special cream applied to exposed skin (especially hands and arms) to
minimize direct contact with hazardous or particularly messy materials/chemicals; another
type of PPE. Also called "invisible glove" or "silicon glove."
Buddy System – A process where two people are paired (or sometimes several people
are grouped) to provide mutual (short- or long-term) service(s) or benefit.(s), such as
teaching, support, safety, accountability, encouragement, friendship, etc.
Change — Event or process that transfers energy or alters a situation, either immediately
or in the future, all at once or gradually.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Controlled Drugs — All medications (painkillers, sedatives, tranquilizers, etc.) that may
induce dependence. Controlled drugs are secured in a locked cabinet. The OIM is
responsible for controlling issuance, disposal, and inventories. See Unit specific
medications for list of controlled drugs.
Company Authorized Physician — A qualified and licensed medical doctor who practices
medicine, preferably near or in the area of the country concerned. The physician has an
expertise of the local diseases and a good knowledge of the local medical resources;
serves as the focal point for health-related matters for Transocean for the area or country of
assignment; and is reachable 24-hours a day.
Company Personnel — Company employees and any subcontracted personnel under the
direct supervision of the Company including leased laborers filling positions that are
considered normal crew complement.
Company Vehicle — Those owned by the Company or on long-term lease (over one
month) for use on public roads.
Confined Space — A space that is not normally lit, not normally ventilated and not
normally manned.
Core Values – Financial Discipline; Integrity and Honesty; Respect for Employees,
Customers and Suppliers; Safety; and Technical Leadership. Referred to by the acronym
FIRST.
Critical Personal Protection Equipment — Specialized clothing, gear and other items
designed to protect personnel from contact with hazards that would reasonably cause
serious injury or death. (For example: SCBA, acid battery suit, proximity suit, fire fighting
PPE, and so on.)
Critical Safety Systems — Systems that affect crucial safety factors, including the overall
stability, seaworthiness, or safety of the installation; welfare of personnel; or environment.
Critical Task — A task that if not performed correctly can cause significant loss to people,
the environment or property.
Designate — To indicate or specify; point out; select and set aside for a duty, purpose or
assignment.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 3 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Designee — A person who has been designated or appointed to act on behalf of another
person.
Emergency Response Plan – Policies and procedures for responding in a safe manner to
life-threatening or damaging situations.
Emissions – Gas(es) released from equipment, especially engines used for power
generation, refrigeration systems and fire-fighting systems.
Exemption – Action or procedure that does not comply with the company Management
System. Exemptions from Company Management System procedures are reviewed and
approved on a case-by-case basis. Must be applied for with a “Request for Exemption.”
Facility — Any onshore yard, warehouse or similar that is owned, leased, operated or
managed by the Company.
Fact Finding — The act or process of gathering facts without a bias towards a presumed
result.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 4 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Fire Watcher – A person closely monitors the area where welding is being done to
eliminate risks and dangers, avoid fires, fight any resulting fires and institute all procedure
necessary to respond to any issue or problem with the Hot Work; fire watchers must have
no other assigned duties while fire watching.
First Aid Case (FAC) — Any treatment of an injury or illness that is the result of an event
or exposure in the work environment (including minor scratches, cuts, burns, splinters and
so forth), and any follow-up visits for the purpose of observation. The following are
generally considered first aid treatment:
• Using a non-prescription medication at non-prescription strength.
• Administering tetanus immunizations.
• Cleaning, flushing or soaking wounds on the surface of the skin.
• Using wound coverings such as bandages, Band-Aids, gauze pads, etc., or using
butterfly bandages or Steri-Strips.
• Using hot or cold therapy.
• Using any non-rigid means of support, such as elastic bandages, wraps, non-rigid
back belts, etc. (devices with rigid stays or other systems designed to immobilize
parts of the body are considered medical treatment).
• Using temporary immobilization devices while transporting an incident victim (e.g.,
splints, slings, neck collars, backboards, etc.).
• Drilling of a fingernail or toenail to relieve pressure, or draining fluid from a blister.
• Using eye patches.
• Removing foreign bodies from the eye using only irrigation or a cotton swab.
• Removing splinters or foreign material from areas other than the eye using irrigation,
tweezers, cotton swabs or other simple means.
• Using finger guards.
• Using massages. (physical therapy and chiropractic treatment are considered
medical treatment.)
• Drinking fluids for relief of heat stress.
• Use of an IV lock (Saline or Heparin) for preventive or precautionary measures. (Use
of the IV lock to administer any medications, including Saline, is considered medical
treatment.)
Hazard — Anything that can cause harm to people, the environment, property or Company
reputation.
Hazard Mapping — The process of establishing where and to what extent particular
phenomena are likely to pose a threat to people, property, infrastructure, and economic
activities. Hazard mapping represents the results of hazard assessment on a map, showing
the frequency/probability of occurrences of various magnitudes or durations.
Hazard Register — Brief but complete summary that demonstrates that the hazards have
been identified, assessed, and that controls (preventative and mitigating)
He, Him and His — For the purpose of this manual means: he/she, him/her and his/hers
Inaction — Something that should or could happen to control an event or incident, but did
not.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 6 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Incident — The occurrence of an action which causes, or has the potential to cause, injury,
environmental damage, or property damage.
Incident Analysis — Use of critical information to establish what happened and, more
significantly, determine how important it is for the Company to act on it. Identification of
corrective and improvement opportunities that represent lessons learned which must be
reviewed against the Company Management System for change and/or improvement.
Incident Analysis consists of four steps: fact-finding, management review of facts,
communication of corrective and improvement opportunities, and development of corrective
and improvement action plans in the FOCUS Planning and Tracking software.
Injury — Physical harm to a person. (For the purposes of this manual, the word “injury” will
be used to indicate injury or occupational illness.)
Installation Medical Person — The person most responsible for providing medical care
onboard the installation.
Isolated (In Isolation) — Rendered completely inoperable and safe to work on; especially,
cut off from all source of power/electricity. Also, marked with signs and barricades to signify
something is completely inoperable.
Leased Labor — Any personnel supplied by outside sources such as temporary agencies,
leasing companies or other labor sources that fill a position that is considered normal crew
complement.
Levels (of Management) — Level 1 is Corporate; Level 2 is Business Unit and Division;
and Level 3 is Installation.
Lifting Appliances – Any mechanical device capable of raising or lowering a load (for
example, crane, chain block, pull lift, winch, drawworks and so on).
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 7 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Lifting Gear – Any device that is used or designed to be used directly or indirectly to
connect a load to a lifting appliance (for example, crane or chain block) and does not form
part of the load (for example, sling, wire rope, chain, hook, plate clamp, scissor clamp,
shackle, eyebolt, lifting beam, bushing puller, lifting device,etc.).
Major Hazard – A hazard with the potential to result in multiple fatalities or permanent total
disabilities; extensive damage to the installation; or massive effect to the environment
(persistent and severe environmental damage that may lead to loss of commercial,
recreational use, or loss of natural resources over a wide area).
Medical Treatment Case (MTC) — Any injury case requiring medical care or treatment
beyond first aid (regardless of the provider of such treatment) and any illness, abnormal
condition or disorder of an employee that does not result in a Restricted Work Case or
Serious Injury Case. Medical treatment does not include first aid treatment even if provided
by a physician or registered professional personnel. Medical treatment cases can include,
but are not limited to:
• Any first-, second-, or third-degree burn that results in one or more outcomes such
as medical treatment, work restrictions, or days away from work.
• Administration of immunizations post exposure, such as Hepatitis B vaccine
(excluding tetanus).
• Removal of foreign bodies embedded in the body, including the eyes.
• Admission to hospital or equivalent medical facility for treatment.
• Needle sticks and “sharps” injuries (needle sticks and injuries that result from sharps
potentially contaminated with another person’s blood or other potentially infectious
material).
• Use of sutures, staples or surgical glue.
• Massage treatment given by a Physical Therapist or Chiropractor.
• Intravenous administration of fluids to treat work-related heat stress.
• Administration of one dose of prescription medication for treatment of the injury or
illness.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 8 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
The following incidents are recordable and are to be classified as MTC, even if no medical
treatment was given, unless they result in RWC, SIC or Fatality.
• Punctured ear drum
• Loss of consciousness
Near Hit — Any event (not resulting in actual damage) that under slightly different
circumstances could have resulted in:
• a first-aid case
• a medical treatment case
• a restricted work case
• a serious injury case with less than 6 months off
• light environmental damage
Non-Work Related
• Injury or illness involving signs or symptoms that surface at work but result from a
non-work related event or exposure that occurs outside the work environment.
• Injury to or illness of members of the general public, visitors, regulatory agents,
employee(s) off duty waiting for transportation to shore or off of the location.
• An injury or illness that results solely from voluntary participation in a wellness
program or in a medical, fitness, or recreational activity such as blood donation,
physical examination, flu shot, exercise class, racquetball, or other sports activity.
• Injury or illness resulting from the employee eating, drinking, or preparing food or
drink for personal consumption.
• Injury or illness resulting from an employee doing personal tasks (unrelated to their
employment) at the establishment.
• Injury or illness resulting from personal grooming or self-medication for a non-work
related condition, or is intentionally self-inflicted.
• Cold or flu.
Office — Any onshore office or similar that is owned, leased, operated or managed by the
Company. An office may be housed as part of a facility. The office area is defined as an
area where the main function of personnel is administrative support for facilities or
installations.
OIM — Offshore Installation Manager. For the purpose of this manual, it also means
Platform Manager and may mean Person in Charge and, where applicable, Facility
Manager or Master.
Over-the-Counter Drugs (OTC) — Any medicine that would normally be available without
a physician’s prescription. See Unit specific medications for list of over-the-counter drugs.
Permit To Work – Authorization to carry out specific work at a certain time and place.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 10 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) – Clothing, equipment and other items designed to
protect personnel from environmental elements and relevant workplace hazards where it is
not practical to reduce relevant exposure to acceptable levels by using engineering control
or practices. PPE include hard hats, steel toe boots, harnesses, respirators, face masks,
hearing protectors, etc. PPE may be supplied by the employee and/or by the Company and
may be assigned to one individual to use (hard hat, steel toe shoes) or available for anyone
to use (emergency ladder, SCBAs, etc.). See also Critical Personal Protective Equipment.
Policy — A minimum requirement that must be strictly adhered to by all personnel at all
times.
• Corporate policy applies worldwide
• Business Unit policy applies to a specific Business Unit
• Installation policy applies to a specific installation
Prescription Drugs — Any medicine that would normally require a prescription from a
physician prior to procurement within the United States. This category includes all non-
prescription drugs used at prescription strength. See Unit specific medications for list of
prescription drugs.
Preventive Controls — Specific barriers that minimize or eliminate the risk of an incident
by reducing the likelihood an incident will occur.
Radio Silence – The state of ceasing, preventing and protecting against all radio signals;
used when activities on an installation are vulnerable to explosion.
Restricted Work Case (RWC) — A situation in which an employee cannot perform all
assigned routine job functions, but does not result in a SIC. An RWC occurs when, as a
consequence of a work-related injury or illness:
• The employee is temporarily assigned to another job.
• The employee cannot perform all of his routine job functions for all or part of his tour,
or the employee works his regularly assigned job but cannot work the full tour.
• An injured person resumes work normally after an injury but later, as a consequence
of that injury, has to be put on restricted work. The injury is then be reclassified as a
RWC.
Restricted or light duty the day of the injury or illness does not make the incident a
restricted work case. If the employee continues under restricted duty the day after the
incident, the case becomes a restricted work case.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 12 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Example 1: An employee injures a knee. The treatment only involves first aid level care and
put on bed rest for the rest of the tour and returns next tour with no limitations. The incident
is classified as a FAC.
Risk Level — A measure of the severity of any potential incident and the probability of it
occurring.
Routine Job Functions — Those work activities that an employee performs regularly (at
least once a week).
Safety Case — A document that contains a summary of the details of the Installation,
Installation management and Company safety management system. The Safety Case is
the highest level of THINK Planning Process for risk management available in the
Company and is used to demonstrate major HSE risks are ALARP to meet regulatory
requirements in the United Kingdom, Norway, Australia and Canada.
Scope — Where, when and to whom the policies and procedures apply.
Serious Injury Case (SIC) — Any injury resulting from a work-related incident that
prevents the injured person from continuing on his next shift. Logistical delay for the
purpose of medical examination shall not be taken into account.
• If the injury happens just before the victim goes on vacation and a medical
examination reveals later on that the injured person is unfit for work, the injury is a
SIC.
• If the injured person resumes work normally after the injury but later, as a
consequence of the same injury, has to be put off work, the injury is reclassified as a
SIC.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 13 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Serious Near Hit — Any event (not resulting in actual damage) that under slightly different
circumstances could have resulted in:
• a serious injury case requiring at least 6 months off
• a fatality
• serious or major environmental damage
Severity Index — A number derived from the measurement of the severity of a series of
incidents; it represents relative changes in severity over time.
Severity – Seriousness, degree or measurement (of damage), the cause of great danger,
harm, damage, discomfort, or distress.
Supervisor — One who directs and watches over the work and performance of others.
Synovial Fluid — A clear, viscid lubricating fluid secreted by membranes in joint cavities,
sheaths of tendons, and bursae.
Task — An individual work assignment carried out by one or more people and which may
be their complete job or a part of a larger job.
Their — His/her
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 14 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 2
ANNEX
DEFINITIONS
Tolerability — Is the willingness to operate with a risk to secure certain benefits and in the
confidence that it is being properly controlled
Total Recordable Incident Rate (TRIR) — The rate of incidents as tracked on a 12-month
rolling average. TRIR is calculated by the formula:
Unexpected Changes – Changes of any kind that were not predicted and planned for,
whether temporary or permanent, particularly changes in expected results, participating
personnel, environment or work conditions, or priorities.
Work — An individual work assignment carried out by one or more people and which may
be their complete job or a part of a larger job.
Work Related — A case is work-related anytime work hours are being recorded and an
event or exposure in the work environment is the discernable cause or contributes to an
injury or illness or significantly aggravates a pre-existing injury or illness.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 15 15
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
ANNEX
INDEX OF DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 2
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY SECTION:
5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 3
ANNEX
INDEX OF DOCUMENTATION
** These forms are not to be modified in any way. It is mandatory that they be used in their
current format.
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 2
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
ANNEX
FILING OF DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 2
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 4
ANNEX
FILING OF DOCUMENTATION
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 2 2
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
abbreviations 5 1 1
accommodation 3 3.1 1
accommodation – inspections 3 3.1 1
accountable - definition 5 2 1
acronyms 5 1 1
actual severity - work related incidents 4 6.3 6
actual severity rate 4 6.3 6
administrative hours 5 2 1
administrative hours, onshore 4 6.3 13
air line couplings 4 2.4 7
air winch - general use 4 5.6 5
air winch - manriding 4 5.6 6
air, grade D 4 2.4 6
air-fed visors and hoods 4 2.4 6
alcohol 4 1.2 1
alerts - HSE 4 4.1 2
all personnel - definition 5 2 1
approval to install/operate client/subcontractor equipment 4 2.3 Fig. A
approved - definition 5 2 1
asbestos - permit to work 4 2.2 11
asbestos, hazardous materials 4 5.7 7
audits, medical 3 2.1 7
authority - definition 5 2 1
authorized - definition 5 2 1
awards - HSE, criteria 4 6.1 2
barrel slings 4 5.6 13
batteries 4 5.9 7
boat operations 4 5.2 3
breathing air compressor 4 2.4 7
buddy system 4 1.1 4
bulletin board - QHSE 4 4.1 2
casing hooks 4 5.6 13
casing stabbing board - fall protection 4 5.5 7
cellular phones - use while driving 4 5.2 5
certified - definition 5 2 1
CFC 5 4 1
chain block 4 5.6 14
chains 4 5.6 3
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 1 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
chemical energy 4 5.4 8
chemical handling and storage 5 1 1
chemical, storage 5 1 1
chlorinated fluorocarbons 5 4 1
circle of life Preface
client 4 2.3 1
client - definition 5 2 1
clinic - installation 3 2.1 2
clinic - pathogens 3 1.2 3
clinics, onshore 3 2.1 1
clothing 4 2.4 7
colors - training 1 3 2
colors process - subcontractors 4 2.3 2
communications, daily 4 4.1 4
Company approved PPE 4 2.4 1
Company authorized physician - definition 5 2 2
Company employee – definition 5 2 2
Company hired subcontractor 4 6.3 13
Company personnel 4 6.3 10
Company personnel - definition 5 2 2
Company protocols, medical 3 2.1 2
Company vehicle 4 5.2 5
Company vehicle - defensive driver training 4 5.2 7
Company vehicle - definition 5 2 2
competent - definition 5 2 3
Compressed air 4 5.4 7
compressed gas 4 5.4 6
compressed gases - training 4 5.4 5
compressor - breathing air 4 2.4 6
confined space 4 2.2 5
confined space - definition 5 2 3
confined space entry 4 2.2 5
confined space entry - permit to work 4 2.2 5
confined space entry checklist 4 2.2 Fig. B
confined space entry equipment 4 2.2 6
confined space entry hot work 4 2.2 9
confined space entry standby person 4 2.2 7
confined space entry training 4 2.2 5
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 2 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
confined space entry ventilation 4 2.2 6
confined space rescue 4 2.2 8
confined space, hot work 4 2.2 9
contact lenses 4 2.4 3
containers, hazardous materials 4 5.7 4
containment, hydrocarbons and chemicals 5 1 1
contractor achievement process 4 2.3 3
controlled drug register 3 2.1 Fig. C
controlled drug register 3 2.1 2
controlled drugs 3 2.1 2
controlled drugs - definition 5 2 2
core values Preface
corporate HSE recognition 4 6.1 1
Coveralls 4 2.4 4
crane boom camera 4 5.6 17
crane equipment and maintenance 4 5.6 18
crane operations 4 5.6 17
crane operators 4 5.6 15
crane signals 4 5.6 Fig. A
crane signals 4 5.6 24
cranes 4 5.6 15
cranes, BOP, pipe handling, gantry 4 5.6 19
critical safety systems - permit to work 4 2.2 10
critical task - definition 5 2 3
cutting, oxygen / acetylene 4 2.2 3
cylinder status tag 4 5.4 Fig. A
cylinders, compressed gas 4 5.4 4
daily operations meeting 4 4.2 3
dangerous liquids 4 5.7 6
dangerous liquids - permit to work 4 2.2 11
days unable to work 4 6.3 14
deck drainage 5 2 1
defensive driver training 4 5.2 5
definitions 5 2 1
de-isolation 4 5.4 10
de-isolation, long term 4 5.4 11
derrick access - fall protection 4 5.5 7
Derrick ladder - fall protection 4 5.5 3
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 3 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
derrick log book 4 5.5 Fig. A
derrickman changeout procedure 4 5.5 7
designated safe welding area 4 2.2 3
designee - definition 5 2 4
discharge and drainage 5 2 1
diving - permit to work 4 2.2 10
division additions 2 1 4
division HSE recognition 4 6.1 1
doors, remotely operated 4 5.3 9
drainage - general deck 5 2 1
drainage - mud areas 5 2 1
drainage - oil storage areas and machinery spaces 5 2 1
drainage and discharge 5 2 1
dress requirements 4 2.4 3
drill - hydrogen sulfide 4 3.2 2
drill line 4 5.6 11
dropped objects - safe work practices 4 5.3 5
drug testing 4 1.2 2
drugs 4 1.2 1
electrical energy 4 5.4 2
electrical safety 4 5.9 1
electrical safety - batteries 4 5.9 7
electrical safety - electrical responsible person 4 5.9 1
electrical safety - electrocution rescue 4 5.9 5
electrical safety - emergency response 4 5.9 5
electrical safety - fire fighting 4 5.9 6
electrical safety - first aid 4 5.9 5
electrical safety - isolation 4 5.9 6
electrical safety - permit to work 4 5.9 6
electrical safety - tools and portable apparatus 4 5.9 1
emergency drill report form 4 3.2 Fig. A
emergency response 4 3.2 1
emergency response - drill and exercise procedures 4 3.2 2
emergency response exercise sheet 4 3.2 Fig. B
emissions 5 4 1
emotional impairment 4 5.8 2
endemic - definition 5 2 4
energy de-isolation 4 5.4 10
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 4 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
energy isolation 4 5.4 8
energy isolation - training 4 5.4 1
energy isolation certificate 4 5.4 Fig. B
energy isolation certificate 4 5.4 Fig. B
energy isolation tag 4 5.4 9
energy sources 4 5.4 2
energy sources - permit to work 4 2.2 10
energy, compressed air 4 5.4 7
energy, compressed gas 4 5.4 5
energy, electrical 4 5.4 2
energy, mechanical 4 5.4 3
energy, pressure 4 5.4 3
energy, thermal, kinetic, chemical, radioactive 4 5.4 7
environmental damage reporting 4 6.3 4
environmental performance plan 5 3 1
environmental policies and procedures 5 1 1
escape packs 4 2.4 5
explosives 4 5.7 5
explosives - permit to work 4 2.2 10
eye bolts 4 5.6 13
eye protection 4 2.4 3
FAC – first aid case 4 6.3 1
facility - definition 5 2 4
fact finding 4 6.3 8
fact finding guidelines 4 6.3 Fig. A
fall arrest systems 4 5.5 5
fall protection 4 5.5 1
fall protection - fixed vertical ladders 4 5.5 3
fall protection - rescue 4 5.5 1
fall protection - traditional 4 5.5 2
fall protection PPE 4 5.5 2
fall protection systems and PPE 4 5.5 2
fall protection training 4 5.5 1
fatality 4 6.3 3
fatality - definition 5 2 5
feedback 4 4.1 4
fire watch - hot work 4 2.2 4
firewatcher’s THINK checklist 4 2.2 Fig. C
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 5 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
first aid case - definition 5 2 5
first aid case - non work related 4 6.3 1
first aid case - work related 4 6.3 3
fixed vertical ladders - fall protection 4 5.5 3
flammable liquids 4 5.7 6
FOCUS - definition 5 2 6
FOCUS improvement process 4 6.2 2
FOCUS tracking system 4 6.2 2
food 3 3.1 2
food handlers - training 3 3.1 2
food leftovers 3 3.1 5
food preparation 3 3.1 4
food protection 3 3.1 5
food storage 3 3.1 3
food transportation 3 3.1 2
food waste 5 2 2
foot protection 4 2.4 5
fork lift 4 5.6 20
freon 5 4 2
frog, personnel transfer basket 4 5.2 3
frog, personnel transfer basket - definition 5 2 6
fuel, oil transfer 5 1 1
function checklist of major equipment 3 2.1 Fig. A
galley 3 3.1 2
galley readers 4 4.1 5
garbage management plan 5 5 2
gas cylinder status tag 4 5.4 Fig. A
gas cylinders 4 5.4 5
gas detectors - hydrogen sulfide 4 3.1 1
gas emissions 5 4 1
gases, hazardous 4 5.7 5
general HSE meetings 4 4.2 3
general safe working practices 4 5.3 7
grade D air 4 2.4 6
H2S 4 3.1 1
H2S detection devices 4 3.1 2
halon 5 4 1
hand protection 4 2.4 4
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 6 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
hand tools - safe work practices 4 5.3 7
handover process - permit to work 4 2.2 12
handover report form 4 4.1 Fig. E
hatches – powered / remote, HSE orientation 4 1.1 Fig. A
hatches – powered / remote, HSE orientation 4 1.1 2
hatches – powered or remote controlled 4 5.3 9
hazard - definition 5 2 6
hazard identification 4 2.1 11
hazard mapping 4 4.1 3
hazardous material containers 4 5.7 4
hazardous materials 4 5.7 1
Hazardous materials - definition 5 2 6
hazardous materials - identification system, HMIS 4 5.7 1
hazardous materials - inventory control 4 5.7 3
hazardous materials - storage and marking 4 5.7 2
hazardous materials / waste 4 5.7 4
hazardous materials, training 4 5.7 1
hazardous operations – types 4 2.2 2
HAZID 4 2.1 11
HAZOP 4 2.1 11
head protection 4 2.4 2
health - definition 5 2 6
hearing protection 4 2.4 2
helicopter landing officer (HLO) 4 5.2 7
helicopter operations 4 5.2 2
helicopter travel 4 5.2 1
helideck 4 5.2 2
hooks, casing 4 5.6 13
horizontal lifelines - fall protection 4 5.5 7
horseplay 4 5.3 3
hoses, oil, fuel transfer 5 1 1
hot work 4 2.2 2
hot work - confined space 4 2.2 9
housekeeping - safe work practices 4 5.3 1
HSE advisories 4 4.1 3
HSE alert - example 4 4.1 Fig. A
HSE alerts 4 4.1 2
HSE award - suggested criteria 4 6.1 2
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 7 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
HSE dept. function 1 2 5
HSE dept. organization 1 3 1
HSE information 4 4.1 1
HSE meeting report form 4 4.2 Fig. A
HSE meetings 4 4.2 1
HSE orientation - facility 4 1.1 5
HSE orientation - installation 4 1.1 1
HSE orientation - job specific 4 1.1 4
HSE orientation - office 4 1.1 6
HSE orientation - short term visitor 4 1.1 2
HSE orientation - verification form, installation & facility 4 1.1 Fig. A
HSE orientation - verification form, office 4 1.1 Fig. C
HSE orientation - verification form, short term visitor 4 1.1 Fig. B
HSE policy statement Preface
HSE recognition 4 6.1 1
HSE signs 4 4.1 3
HSE signs – pictogram examples 4 4.1 Fig. B
hydrocarbon and chemical spill 5 3 1
hydrocarbons and chemicals - containment and handling 5 1 1
hydrocarbons and chemicals - procedures 5 1 1
hydrocarbons and chemicals - storage 5 1 1
hygiene 3 3.1 1
hygiene, inspections 3 3.1 1
hygiene, personal 3 3.1 9
immunization 3 1.1 2
impairment 4 5.8 1
incident - definition 5 2 7
Incident analysis protocol 4 6.3 8
incident ID number 4 6.3 1
incident investigation - fact finding 4 6.3 8
incident investigation - management review of facts 4 6.3 8
incident rate chart - monthly 4 4.1 1
incident report flow 4 6.3 1
incident report form 4 6.3 Fig. B
incident reporting 4 6.3 1
individual personal medical record 3 2.1 Fig. D
inertia reels - fall protection 4 5.5 2
injury - definition 5 2 7
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 8 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
installation - definition 5 2 7
installation HSE recognition 4 6.1 1
installation medical person 3 2.1 2
installation medical person - definition 5 2 7
interviews, incident investigation 4 6.3 18
investigation - definition 5 2 4
ISM code 2 4 1
isolation - competent person 4 5.4 9
isolation - long term 4 5.4 10
isolation - responsible person 4 5.4 7
isolation - standard process 4 5.4 9
isolation certificate 4 5.4 Fig. B
isolation certificate 4 5.4 Fig. B
isolation tag 4 5.4 9
isolation training 4 5.4 1
jewelry 4 2.4 3
kinetic energy 4 5.4 7
knives - safe work practices 4 5.3 7
ladder register 4 5.3 9
ladder, derrick - fall protection 4 5.5 3
ladders and steps, portable - safe work practices 4 5.3 8
ladders, fixed vertical - fall protection 4 5.5 3
leased labor 4 6.3 12
leased labor - definition 5 2 8
levels of risk management 4 2.1 1
lifelines, horizontal - fall protection 4 5.5 7
lifelines, self retracting (inertia reels) 4 5.5 6
lifting appliances 4 5.6 1
lifting equipment 4 5.6 2
lifting equipment - annual examination 4 5.6 2
lifting equipment - maintenance 4 5.6 1
lifting equipment register 4 5.6 2
lifting gear 4 5.6 1
lifting gear and appliances - portable 4 5.6 12
lifting gear, other 4 5.6 9
lifting of personnel - manriding 4 5.6 6
liquids, hazardous 4 5.7 6
load test - definition 5 2 8
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 9 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
long term de-isolation 4 5.4 11
long term isolation 4 5.4 10
major accident hazard risk assessment (MAHRA) 4 2.1 11
malaria awareness 3 1.1 2
man hours 4 6.3 6
management of change 1 4 1
management of change - approach flow charts 1 4 Figs. B-D
management of change - enhanced approach 1 4 4
management of change – exemptions 1 4 5
management of change - process 1 4 3
management of change - request for exemption, form 1 4 Fig. F
management of change - simple approach 1 4 4
management review of facts 4 6.3 8
manriding 4 5.6 6
manriding - permit to work 4 2.2 11
manriding tugger signals 4 5.6 Fig. B
manuals - unit/division 2 1 3
MARPOL 5 2 2
MARPOL - shipboard garbage management plan 5 5 2
material safety data sheet 4 5.7 2
mechanical energy 4 5.4 3
mechanical lifting 4 5.6 1
medical activity log 3 2.1 Fig. E
medical activity log 3 2.1 4
medical audits 3 2.1 7
medical briefing 3 1.1 1
medical documentation 3 2.1 4
medical emergency response plan 4 3.2 2
medical evacuation - forms to use 3 2.1 Figs. D-F
medical treatment - non work related 4 6.3 1
medical treatment - work related 4 6.3 3
medical treatment case - definition 5 2 8
medications 3 2.1 2
meetings 4 4.2 1
mental impairment 4 5.8 3
mentoring 2 3 1
mess hall 3 3.1 1
methods of fall protection 4 5.5 2
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 10 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
mission statement Preface
monthly incident rate chart 4 4.1 1
monthly inventory (of drugs, consumables, perishables) 3 2.1 Fig. B
Monthly statistics report 4 6.3 10
MSDS - material safety data sheet 4 5.7 2
MTC - medical treatment case 4 6.3 3
mud system, controlling discharges 5 1 1
must - definition 5 2 9
near hit 4 6.3 3
near hit - definition 5 2 10
nitrogen cylinders - checking 4 5.4 7
non prescription drugs 5 2 10
non prescription drugs - definition 5 2 10
non work related first aid 4 6.3 1
non work related injury - definition 5 2 10
non work related medical treatment 4 6.3 3
non-personal injury reporting 4 6.3 3
nuclear energy 4 5.4 8
nylon slings 4 5.6 13
observations, incident investigation 4 6.3 18
observations, safe and unsafe 4 6.3 3
office - definition 5 2 10
offshore emergency response manual 4 3.2 1
oil record book 5 2 1
oil, fuel transfer 5 1 1
oily water separator 5 2 1
OIM - definition 5 2 11
OIM - permit to work 4 2.2 10
onshore administrative hours 4 6.3 13
onshore emergency response manual 4 3.2 1
onshore physicians and clinics 3 2.1 9
operations meeting 4 4.2 3
over-the-counter drugs 5 2 11
over-the-counter drugs - definition 5 2 11
oxygen / acetylene cutting 4 2.2 3
oxygen / acetylene cylinders 4 5.4 7
padeyes 4 5.6 3
paint, hazardous materials 4 5.7 7
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 11 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
pathogen - definition 5 2 11
pathogen protection kits 3 1.2 2
pathogens 3 1.2 1
patient contact report (PCR) 3 2.1 Fig. F
patient contact report (PCR) 3 2.1 4
permit to work 4 2.2 Fig. A
permit to work 4 2.2 1
permit to work - displaying 4 2.2 12
permit to work - handover 4 2.2 12
permit to work - objectives and functions 4 2.2 1
permit to work - person in charge 4 2.2 12
permit to work - reactivation 4 2.2 12
permit to work - responsible person 4 2.2 13
permit to work - suspension 4 2.2 12
permit to work - system administrator 4 2.2 15
permit to work - types of hazardous operations 4 2.2 2
permit to work - validity 4 2.2 2
personal hygiene 3 3.1 9
personal impairment 4 5.8 1
personal injury report 4 6.3 3
personal medical record 3 2.1 Fig. D
personal medical record 3 2.1 4
personal protective equipment 4 2.4 1
personnel basket 4 5.2 3
physical impairment 4 5.8 1
physicians and clinics - onshore 3 2.1 9
physicians, authorized 3 2.1 7
pictogram examples - HSE signs 4 4.1 Fig. B
pictogram -HSE signs 4 4.1 3
pinch points - safe work practices 4 5.3 4
pipe hooks 4 5.6 8
policy - definition 5 2 11
portable ladders and steps 4 5.3 8
portable lifting gear and appliances 4 5.6 12
potable water - sampling / quality / testing 3 2.2 1
potential severity - work related incidents 4 6.3 6
potential severity rate 4 6.3 6
powered - local/remote control doors - safe work practices 4 5.3 9
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 12 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
PPE 4 2.4 1
PPE - dedicated 4 2.4 7
PPE, fall protection 4 5.5 2
pre-assignment screening & briefing for overseas posting 3 1.1 1
prescription drugs 3 2.1 2
Prescription drugs - definition 5 2 12
pressure testing - permit to work 4 2.2 11
pressure energy 4 5.4 3
pre-task meeting 4 4.2 3
pre-tour meeting 4 4.2 3
privileged document 3 2.1 4
privileged document - definition 5 2 12
procedure - definition 5 2 12
Process - definition 5 2 12
property damage reporting 4 6.3 4
public domain 3 2.1 4
Public domain - definition 5 2 12
purpose - definition 5 2 12
QHSE bulletin board 4 4.1 2
QHSE feedback form 4 4.1 Fig. F
QHSE steering committee 2 2 1
QHSE steering committee meeting 4 4.2 3
QHSE steering committee meeting - agenda 2 2 Fig. A
QHSE steering committee meeting - minutes 2 2 Fig. B
Radio silence 4 5.7 8
radio silence THINK checklist 4 5.7 Fig. A
radioactive energy 4 5.4 8
radioactive materials 4 5.7 5
radioactive materials - permit to work 4 2.2 10
reactivation of permits - permit to work 4 2.2 12
recognition - HSE 4 6.1 1
recreational swimming, diving 4 5.3 3
refrigerators and freezers - “walk- in” 3 3.1 3
remote controlled machinery 4 5.3 10
reporting 4 6.3 1
reporting - definition 5 2 13
respiratory protection 4 2.4 5
responsibility 1 3 1
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 13 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
responsibility - definition 5 2 13
responsible person - permit to work 4 2.2 13
restricted work case (RWC) 4 6.3 3
restricted work case (RWC) - definition 5 2 13
risk – definition 5 2 13
risk assessment 4 2.1 1
risk level – definition 5 2 13
risk management 4 2.1 1
risk management - levels 4 2.1 2
risk management tools 4 2.1 2
risk matrix 4 2.1 10
rope 4 5.6 2
routine job functions - definition 5 2 14
safe behavior 4 5.3 1
safe working limits 4 5.3 3
safe working practices 4 5.3 7
safety case 4 2.1 12
safety goggles 4 2.4 3
sanitation 3 3.1 1
scaffolding - fall protection 4 5.5 9
SCBA 4 2.4 5
SCBA - hydrogen sulfide 4 3.1 2
Scope - definition 5 2 14
seat belts, vehicle 4 5.2 2
security 4 1.1 1
self contained breathing apparatus - SCBA 4 2.4 5
self retracting lifelines (inertia reels) 4 5.5 2
serious incident bulletins 4 4.1 2
serious injury case 4 6.3 3
serious injury case (SIC) - definition 5 2 14
serious near hit 4 6.3 3
serious near hit - definition 5 2 14
severity - actual 4 6.3 6
severity - calculation 4 6.3 6
severity - potential 4 6.3 6
severity - work related incidents 4 6.3 4
severity rate 4 6.3 5
sewage 5 2 2
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 14 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
shackle 4 5.6 14
sharps – disposal off 3 1.2 3
shift handover 4 4.1 14
shift handover report 4 4.1 Fig. E
Shipboard Garbage Management Plan 5 5 2
should - definition 5 2 15
SIC – serious injury case 4 6.3 3
signals, crane 4 5.6 24
signals, manriding tugger 4 5.6 8
sling - nylon, web 4 5.6 13
sling - wire rope 4 5.6 12
sling, web - permit to work 4 2.2 11
slings, barrel 4 5.6 13
smoking limitations 3 3.1 9
snatch block 4 5.6 14
SNH - serious near hit 4 6.3 3
soiled linen 3 1.2 3
SOPEP 5 3 1
spill - definition 5 2 15
spill response plan 5 3 1
spills 5 3 1
standard de-isolation process 4 5.4 10
standard isolation process 4 5.4 9
standing instructions to crane operators - form 4 4.1 Fig. D
standing instructions to drillers - form 4 4.1 Fig. C
START - definition 5 2 15
START - meaning 4 5.1 1
START - training 4 5.1 3
START Card 4 5.1 Fig. A
START card 4 5.1 1
START monitoring process 4 5.1 1
START observations 4 5.1 4
START tracking 4 5.1 4
statement of understanding (pathogens) 3 1.2 Fig. A
statistics reporting 4 6.3 10
steering committee meeting 4 4.2 3
storage, hydrocarbons and chemicals 5 1 1
straps 4 5.6 8
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 15 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
straps, lifting - permit to work 4 2.2 11
subcontractor equipment 4 2.3 2
subcontractor equipment - approval to install 4 2.3 3
subcontractor personnel 4 2.3 1
subcontractors - color process 4 2.3 2
subcontractors - definition 5 2 15
substance abuse 4 1.2 1
supervisor - definition 5 2 15
supply boats - permit to work 4 2.2 10
suspension of permits - permit to work 4 2.2 12
swimming 4 5.3 3
system administrator - permit to work 4 2.2 15
task - definition 5 2 15
task risk assessment 4 2.1 9
task risk assessment worksheet - back 4 2.1 Fig. C2
task risk assessment worksheet - front 4 2.1 Fig. C1
thermal energy 4 5.4 7
THINK - definition 5 2 15
THINK planning process 4 2.1 2
THINK planning process – checklist 4 2.1 Fig. A2
THINK planning process – daily written plan 4 2.1 7
THINK planning process – individual 4 2.1 6
THINK planning process – verbal 4 2.1 7
THINK planning process – written 4 2.1 7
THINK planning process – written plan 4 2.1 Fig. A1
THINK procedure, task specific 4 2.1 Fig. B
THINK procedure, task specific 4 2.1 8
tools and portable apparatus 4 5.9 1
total recordable incident rate 4 6.3 11
total recordable incident rate (TRIR) - definition 5 2 15
training 4 1.3 1
training, confined space entry 4 2.2 5
training, hazardous materials 4 5.7 1
travel 4 5.2 1
travel safety briefing 4 5.2 1
tripping of tubulars - safe work practices 4 5.3 4
TRIR 4 6.3 11
Trolley 4 5.6 19
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 16 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 5
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 5
ANNEX
Index of Keywords
Sub Starting
Key Word
Section Section on page
try to operate - energy isolation 4 5.4 12
tuggers - general use 4 5.6 5
tuggers - manriding 4 5.6 9
unit additions 2 1 4
unit HSE recognition 4 6.1 1
vision - Company 1 3 1
waste management 5 5 1
watertight doors - powered 4 5.3 9
watertight doors - powered, HSE orientation 4 1.1 Fig. A
watertight doors - powered, HSE orientation 4 1.1 2
weapons 4 1.2 1
weapons - definition 5 2 16
webbing sling - permit to work 4 2.2 11
webbing slings 4 5.6 13
weekly departmental HSE meetings 4 4.2 2
weekly sanitation and hygiene checklist 3 3.1 Fig. A
welcome onboard card - back 4 1.1 Fig. D2
welcome onboard card - front 4 1.1 Fig. D1
welder 4 2.2 3
welder - PPE 4 2.2 4
Welding 4 2.2 2
welding shop 4 2.2 3
will - definition 5 2 16
winch - general use 4 5.6 5
winch - manriding 4 5.6 6
wire rope 4 5.6 12
Wire rope - re-terminating 4 5.6 14
wire rope slings 4 5.6 12
work - definition 5 2 16
work above open water 4 2.2 9
work related incident 4 6.3 3
work related incident - severity 4 6.3 4
work related injury - definition 5 2 16
work vests 4 2.4 4
working hours 4 6.3 6
working hours - definition 5 2 16
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 01 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: JANUARY 14, 2008 17 17
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION: 6
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES MANUAL
HQS-HSE-PP-01 SUBSECTION: 0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Hardcopies are printed from an electronic system and are not controlled
ISSUE NO: 03 REVISION NO: 00 PAGE OF
REVISION DATE: OCTOBER 31, 2007 1 1
COPYRIGHT © 2003 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK